EP1770676B1 - Display device and electronic device - Google Patents
Display device and electronic device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- EP1770676B1 EP1770676B1 EP06019181.4A EP06019181A EP1770676B1 EP 1770676 B1 EP1770676 B1 EP 1770676B1 EP 06019181 A EP06019181 A EP 06019181A EP 1770676 B1 EP1770676 B1 EP 1770676B1
- Authority
- EP
- European Patent Office
- Prior art keywords
- light
- pixel
- emitting element
- emitting
- emitting elements
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Not-in-force
Links
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 claims description 163
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims description 143
- 238000000295 emission spectrum Methods 0.000 claims description 125
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 claims description 42
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims description 28
- 238000005401 electroluminescence Methods 0.000 claims description 4
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 247
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 139
- 239000010408 film Substances 0.000 description 123
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 56
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 55
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 33
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 32
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 30
- 230000005525 hole transport Effects 0.000 description 28
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 26
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 20
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 19
- 238000005192 partition Methods 0.000 description 17
- 239000000565 sealant Substances 0.000 description 17
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 14
- 238000010549 co-Evaporation Methods 0.000 description 14
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 14
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon dioxide Inorganic materials O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 239000011229 interlayer Substances 0.000 description 12
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 12
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 229910021417 amorphous silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 11
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 11
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 11
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000008719 thickening Effects 0.000 description 11
- WUKWITHWXAAZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-L calcium difluoride Chemical compound [F-].[F-].[Ca+2] WUKWITHWXAAZEY-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 10
- 229910001634 calcium fluoride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- VBVAVBCYMYWNOU-UHFFFAOYSA-N coumarin 6 Chemical compound C1=CC=C2SC(C3=CC4=CC=C(C=C4OC3=O)N(CC)CC)=NC2=C1 VBVAVBCYMYWNOU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 10
- 239000012212 insulator Substances 0.000 description 10
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 10
- NRTOMJZYCJJWKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium nitride Chemical compound [Ti]#N NRTOMJZYCJJWKI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 239000011575 calcium Substances 0.000 description 8
- PQQKPALAQIIWST-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxomolybdenum Chemical compound [Mo]=O PQQKPALAQIIWST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 8
- XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc monoxide Chemical compound [Zn]=O XLOMVQKBTHCTTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 7
- 229910052791 calcium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 7
- SPDPTFAJSFKAMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-n-[4-[4-(n-[4-(3-methyl-n-(3-methylphenyl)anilino)phenyl]anilino)phenyl]phenyl]-4-n,4-n-bis(3-methylphenyl)-1-n-phenylbenzene-1,4-diamine Chemical group CC1=CC=CC(N(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)=C1 SPDPTFAJSFKAMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- -1 a-InGaZnO Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 6
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- TVIVIEFSHFOWTE-UHFFFAOYSA-K tri(quinolin-8-yloxy)alumane Chemical compound [Al+3].C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1.C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1.C1=CN=C2C([O-])=CC=CC2=C1 TVIVIEFSHFOWTE-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 6
- 239000011701 zinc Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229910045601 alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000000956 alloy Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229910010272 inorganic material Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229910000476 molybdenum oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 150000002894 organic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 5
- 239000011368 organic material Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000010453 quartz Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000010409 thin film Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229910017073 AlLi Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229910017911 MgIn Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc Chemical compound [Zn] HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 4
- UFVXQDWNSAGPHN-UHFFFAOYSA-K bis[(2-methylquinolin-8-yl)oxy]-(4-phenylphenoxy)alumane Chemical compound [Al+3].C1=CC=C([O-])C2=NC(C)=CC=C21.C1=CC=C([O-])C2=NC(C)=CC=C21.C1=CC([O-])=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 UFVXQDWNSAGPHN-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 4
- 239000000919 ceramic Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 4
- XCJYREBRNVKWGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N copper(II) phthalocyanine Chemical compound [Cu+2].C12=CC=CC=C2C(N=C2[N-]C(C3=CC=CC=C32)=N2)=NC1=NC([C]1C=CC=CC1=1)=NC=1N=C1[C]3C=CC=CC3=C2[N-]1 XCJYREBRNVKWGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000012535 impurity Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000011147 inorganic material Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052744 lithium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- AHLBNYSZXLDEJQ-FWEHEUNISA-N orlistat Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCC[C@H](OC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC=O)C[C@@H]1OC(=O)[C@H]1CCCCCC AHLBNYSZXLDEJQ-FWEHEUNISA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910021420 polycrystalline silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000010935 stainless steel Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910001220 stainless steel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229910052725 zinc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc indium(3+) oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O--].[Zn++].[In+3] YVTHLONGBIQYBO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- ZVFQEOPUXVPSLB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4-phenylphenyl)-1,2,4-triazole Chemical compound C1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=CC=C1C(N1C=2C=CC=CC=2)=NN=C1C1=CC=C(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=C1 ZVFQEOPUXVPSLB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- DHDHJYNTEFLIHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=NC2=C1C=CC1=C(C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=CN=C21 DHDHJYNTEFLIHY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 241001270131 Agaricus moelleri Species 0.000 description 3
- UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Benzene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1 UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000007983 Tris buffer Substances 0.000 description 3
- CUJRVFIICFDLGR-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetylacetonate Chemical compound CC(=O)[CH-]C(C)=O CUJRVFIICFDLGR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N acrylic acid group Chemical group C(C=C)(=O)O NIXOWILDQLNWCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000006185 dispersion Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- IBHBKWKFFTZAHE-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[4-[4-(n-naphthalen-1-ylanilino)phenyl]phenyl]-n-phenylnaphthalen-1-amine Chemical group C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C2=CC=CC=C2C=CC=1)C1=CC=C(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C3=CC=CC=C3C=CC=2)C=C1 IBHBKWKFFTZAHE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- IEQIEDJGQAUEQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N phthalocyanine Chemical compound N1C(N=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C(N=C3C4=CC=CC=C4C(=N4)N3)=N2)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1N=C1C2=CC=CC=C2C4=N1 IEQIEDJGQAUEQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 3
- YYMBJDOZVAITBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N rubrene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C(C1=C(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C2=CC=CC=C2C(C=2C=CC=CC=2)=C11)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 YYMBJDOZVAITBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000007740 vapor deposition Methods 0.000 description 3
- 125000000391 vinyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 3
- IYZMXHQDXZKNCY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-n,1-n-diphenyl-4-n,4-n-bis[4-(n-phenylanilino)phenyl]benzene-1,4-diamine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 IYZMXHQDXZKNCY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UOCMXZLNHQBBOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(1,3-benzoxazol-2-yl)phenol zinc Chemical compound [Zn].Oc1ccccc1-c1nc2ccccc2o1.Oc1ccccc1-c1nc2ccccc2o1 UOCMXZLNHQBBOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FQJQNLKWTRGIEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-5-[3-[5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]phenyl]-1,3,4-oxadiazole Chemical compound C1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=CC=C1C1=NN=C(C=2C=C(C=CC=2)C=2OC(=NN=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C(C)(C)C)O1 FQJQNLKWTRGIEB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GEQBRULPNIVQPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[3,5-bis(1-phenylbenzimidazol-2-yl)phenyl]-1-phenylbenzimidazole Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N1C2=CC=CC=C2N=C1C1=CC(C=2N(C3=CC=CC=C3N=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)=CC(C=2N(C3=CC=CC=C3N=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1 GEQBRULPNIVQPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- AWXGSYPUMWKTBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-carbazol-9-yl-n,n-bis(4-carbazol-9-ylphenyl)aniline Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1=CC=C(N(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=C1 AWXGSYPUMWKTBR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VFUDMQLBKNMONU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-[4-(4-carbazol-9-ylphenyl)phenyl]carbazole Chemical group C12=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2N1C1=CC=C(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=CC=C32)C=C1 VFUDMQLBKNMONU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PIGFYZPCRLYGLF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Aluminum nitride Chemical compound [Al]#N PIGFYZPCRLYGLF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Argon Chemical compound [Ar] XKRFYHLGVUSROY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920000298 Cellophane Polymers 0.000 description 2
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010052128 Glare Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 101000837344 Homo sapiens T-cell leukemia translocation-altered gene protein Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 229910000846 In alloy Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920001609 Poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004642 Polyimide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052581 Si3N4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 102100028692 T-cell leukemia translocation-altered gene protein Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001174 ascending effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- GQVWHWAWLPCBHB-UHFFFAOYSA-L beryllium;benzo[h]quinolin-10-olate Chemical compound [Be+2].C1=CC=NC2=C3C([O-])=CC=CC3=CC=C21.C1=CC=NC2=C3C([O-])=CC=CC3=CC=C21 GQVWHWAWLPCBHB-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 239000002041 carbon nanotube Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910021393 carbon nanotube Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000011651 chromium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000004696 coordination complex Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000004070 electrodeposition Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000005284 excitation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000011152 fibreglass Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011888 foil Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052733 gallium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- RBTKNAXYKSUFRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N heliogen blue Chemical compound [Cu].[N-]1C2=C(C=CC=C3)C3=C1N=C([N-]1)C3=CC=CC=C3C1=NC([N-]1)=C(C=CC=C3)C3=C1N=C([N-]1)C3=CC=CC=C3C1=N2 RBTKNAXYKSUFRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium(iii) oxide Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[In+3].[In+3] PJXISJQVUVHSOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000002346 layers by function Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- YRZZLAGRKZIJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxyvanadium phthalocyanine Chemical compound [V+2]=O.C12=CC=CC=C2C(N=C2[N-]C(C3=CC=CC=C32)=N2)=NC1=NC([C]1C=CC=CC1=1)=NC=1N=C1[C]3C=CC=CC3=C2[N-]1 YRZZLAGRKZIJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000011574 phosphorus Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920002120 photoresistant polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920001721 polyimide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920005591 polysilicon Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920002620 polyvinyl fluoride Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920006395 saturated elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 2
- HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicon nitride Chemical compound N12[Si]34N5[Si]62N3[Si]51N64 HQVNEWCFYHHQES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 238000007447 staining method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000004575 stone Substances 0.000 description 2
- ODHXBMXNKOYIBV-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenylamine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 ODHXBMXNKOYIBV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011787 zinc oxide Substances 0.000 description 2
- DTZWGKCFKSJGPK-VOTSOKGWSA-N (e)-2-(2-methyl-6-(2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-1,2,3,5,6,7-hexahydropyrido[3,2,1-ij]quinolin-9-yl)vinyl)-4h-pyran-4-ylidene)malononitrile Chemical compound O1C(C)=CC(=C(C#N)C#N)C=C1\C=C\C1=CC(C(CCN2CCC3(C)C)(C)C)=C2C3=C1 DTZWGKCFKSJGPK-VOTSOKGWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- POILWHVDKZOXJZ-ARJAWSKDSA-M (z)-4-oxopent-2-en-2-olate Chemical compound C\C([O-])=C\C(C)=O POILWHVDKZOXJZ-ARJAWSKDSA-M 0.000 description 1
- OBMPIWRNYHXYBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-n,1-n,3-n,3-n,5-n,5-n-hexakis(3-methylphenyl)benzene-1,3,5-triamine Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC(N(C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)C=2C=C(C=C(C=2)N(C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)N(C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)=C1 OBMPIWRNYHXYBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- STTGYIUESPWXOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline Chemical compound C=12C=CC3=C(C=4C=CC=CC=4)C=C(C)N=C3C2=NC(C)=CC=1C1=CC=CC=C1 STTGYIUESPWXOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XANIFASCQKHXRC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(1,3-benzothiazol-2-yl)phenol zinc Chemical compound [Zn].Oc1ccccc1-c1nc2ccccc2s1.Oc1ccccc1-c1nc2ccccc2s1 XANIFASCQKHXRC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RKVIAZWOECXCCM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-carbazol-9-yl-n,n-diphenylaniline Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C(=CC=CC=1)N1C2=CC=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C21)C1=CC=CC=C1 RKVIAZWOECXCCM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OBAJPWYDYFEBTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-tert-butyl-9,10-dinaphthalen-2-ylanthracene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC(C3=C4C=CC=CC4=C(C=4C=C5C=CC=CC5=CC=4)C4=CC=C(C=C43)C(C)(C)C)=CC=C21 OBAJPWYDYFEBTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PZLZJGZGJHZQAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-4-(4-ethylphenyl)-5-(4-phenylphenyl)-1,2,4-triazole Chemical compound C1=CC(CC)=CC=C1N1C(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C(C)(C)C)=NN=C1C1=CC=C(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=C1 PZLZJGZGJHZQAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OGGKVJMNFFSDEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-methyl-n-[4-[4-(n-(3-methylphenyl)anilino)phenyl]phenyl]-n-phenylaniline Chemical group CC1=CC=CC(N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C=2C=CC(=CC=2)N(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C=2C=C(C)C=CC=2)=C1 OGGKVJMNFFSDEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HXWWMGJBPGRWRS-CMDGGOBGSA-N 4- -2-tert-butyl-6- -4h-pyran Chemical compound O1C(C(C)(C)C)=CC(=C(C#N)C#N)C=C1\C=C\C1=CC(C(CCN2CCC3(C)C)(C)C)=C2C3=C1 HXWWMGJBPGRWRS-CMDGGOBGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YYBDMVYJCYKTAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-methyl-2-[1-(5-methyl-1,3-benzoxazol-2-yl)-4-(2-phenylethenyl)cyclohexa-2,4-dien-1-yl]-1,3-benzoxazole Chemical compound N=1C2=CC(C)=CC=C2OC=1C(C=C1)(C=2OC3=CC=C(C)C=C3N=2)CC=C1C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 YYBDMVYJCYKTAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UOOBIWAELCOCHK-BQYQJAHWSA-N 870075-87-9 Chemical compound O1C(C(C)C)=CC(=C(C#N)C#N)C=C1\C=C\C1=CC(C(CCN2CCC3(C)C)(C)C)=C2C3=C1 UOOBIWAELCOCHK-BQYQJAHWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VIZUPBYFLORCRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9,10-dinaphthalen-2-ylanthracene Chemical compound C12=CC=CC=C2C(C2=CC3=CC=CC=C3C=C2)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1C1=CC=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1 VIZUPBYFLORCRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FCNCGHJSNVOIKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9,10-diphenylanthracene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C(C1=CC=CC=C11)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 FCNCGHJSNVOIKE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004925 Acrylic resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000178 Acrylic resin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002799 BoPET Polymers 0.000 description 1
- ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Boron Chemical compound [B] ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MSDMPJCOOXURQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N C545T Chemical compound C1=CC=C2SC(C3=CC=4C=C5C6=C(C=4OC3=O)C(C)(C)CCN6CCC5(C)C)=NC2=C1 MSDMPJCOOXURQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 208000016169 Fish-eye disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- GYHNNYVSQQEPJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Gallium Chemical compound [Ga] GYHNNYVSQQEPJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001218 Gallium arsenide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 241000282412 Homo Species 0.000 description 1
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005041 Mylar™ Substances 0.000 description 1
- 101100175003 Oryza sativa subsp. japonica RGB1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000577 Silicon-germanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- XHCLAFWTIXFWPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[V+5].[V+5] Chemical compound [O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[O-2].[V+5].[V+5] XHCLAFWTIXFWPH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052784 alkaline earth metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910001618 alkaline earth metal fluoride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910000287 alkaline earth metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001342 alkaline earth metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000001408 amides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052786 argon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052785 arsenic Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- RQNWIZPPADIBDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N arsenic atom Chemical compound [As] RQNWIZPPADIBDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005264 aryl amine group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 1
- UMIVXZPTRXBADB-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzocyclobutene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2CCC2=C1 UMIVXZPTRXBADB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000903 blocking effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052796 boron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- XZCJVWCMJYNSQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N butyl pbd Chemical compound C1=CC(C(C)(C)C)=CC=C1C1=NN=C(C=2C=CC(=CC=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)O1 XZCJVWCMJYNSQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001716 carbazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000006229 carbon black Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004040 coloring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002860 competitive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007872 degassing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002274 desiccant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 1
- BKMIWBZIQAAZBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N diindenoperylene Chemical compound C12=C3C4=CC=C2C2=CC=CC=C2C1=CC=C3C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C3=CC=C4C1=C32 BKMIWBZIQAAZBD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003822 epoxy resin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000945 filler Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004313 glare Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052736 halogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000002367 halogens Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011261 inert gas Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000002484 inorganic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052741 iridium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium atom Chemical compound [Ir] GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UEEXRMUCXBPYOV-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium;2-phenylpyridine Chemical compound [Ir].C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=N1.C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=N1.C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=N1 UEEXRMUCXBPYOV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000031700 light absorption Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000015250 liver sausages Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000004020 luminiscence type Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910001512 metal fluoride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 1
- SFSWXKUCNTZAPG-UHFFFAOYSA-N n,n-diphenyl-4-[3-[4-(n-phenylanilino)phenyl]quinoxalin-2-yl]aniline Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1N(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)C=1C(=NC2=CC=CC=C2N=1)C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(C=1C=CC=CC=1)C=1C=CC=CC=1)C1=CC=CC=C1 SFSWXKUCNTZAPG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012788 optical film Substances 0.000 description 1
- DYIZHKNUQPHNJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxorhenium Chemical compound [Re]=O DYIZHKNUQPHNJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000016 photochemical curing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000206 photolithography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000647 polyepoxide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000728 polyester Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006798 recombination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005215 recombination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003252 repetitive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910003449 rhenium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000000630 rising effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910001925 ruthenium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- WOCIAKWEIIZHES-UHFFFAOYSA-N ruthenium(iv) oxide Chemical compound O=[Ru]=O WOCIAKWEIIZHES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005070 sampling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000035939 shock Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910021332 silicide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FVBUAEGBCNSCDD-UHFFFAOYSA-N silicide(4-) Chemical compound [Si-4] FVBUAEGBCNSCDD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- BDHFUVZGWQCTTF-UHFFFAOYSA-M sulfonate Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)=O BDHFUVZGWQCTTF-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 238000007669 thermal treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N tin dioxide Chemical compound O=[Sn]=O XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001887 tin oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910001935 vanadium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OYQCBJZGELKKPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N zinc indium(3+) oxygen(2-) Chemical compound [O-2].[Zn+2].[O-2].[In+3] OYQCBJZGELKKPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L27/00—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate
- H01L27/15—Devices consisting of a plurality of semiconductor or other solid-state components formed in or on a common substrate including semiconductor components having potential barriers, specially adapted for light emission
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05B—ELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
- H05B33/00—Electroluminescent light sources
- H05B33/12—Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces
- H05B33/14—Light sources with substantially two-dimensional radiating surfaces characterised by the chemical or physical composition or the arrangement of the electroluminescent material, or by the simultaneous addition of the electroluminescent material in or onto the light source
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H01—ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
- H01L—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
- H01L29/00—Semiconductor devices specially adapted for rectifying, amplifying, oscillating or switching and having potential barriers; Capacitors or resistors having potential barriers, e.g. a PN-junction depletion layer or carrier concentration layer; Details of semiconductor bodies or of electrodes thereof ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/66—Types of semiconductor device ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor
- H01L29/68—Types of semiconductor device ; Multistep manufacturing processes therefor controllable by only the electric current supplied, or only the electric potential applied, to an electrode which does not carry the current to be rectified, amplified or switched
- H01L29/76—Unipolar devices, e.g. field effect transistors
- H01L29/772—Field effect transistors
- H01L29/78—Field effect transistors with field effect produced by an insulated gate
- H01L29/786—Thin film transistors, i.e. transistors with a channel being at least partly a thin film
- H01L29/7869—Thin film transistors, i.e. transistors with a channel being at least partly a thin film having a semiconductor body comprising an oxide semiconductor material, e.g. zinc oxide, copper aluminium oxide, cadmium stannate
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/30—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission
- H10K59/35—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels
- H10K59/351—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels comprising more than three subpixels, e.g. red-green-blue-white [RGBW]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/30—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission
- H10K59/35—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels
- H10K59/352—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels the areas of the RGB subpixels being different
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/30—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission
- H10K59/35—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels
- H10K59/353—Devices specially adapted for multicolour light emission comprising red-green-blue [RGB] subpixels characterised by the geometrical arrangement of the RGB subpixels
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
- G09G2300/04—Structural and physical details of display devices
- G09G2300/0439—Pixel structures
- G09G2300/0452—Details of colour pixel setup, e.g. pixel composed of a red, a blue and two green components
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/2003—Display of colours
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/2007—Display of intermediate tones
- G09G3/2074—Display of intermediate tones using sub-pixels
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
- G09G3/22—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources
- G09G3/30—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels
- G09G3/32—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED]
- G09G3/3208—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
- H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
- H10K59/10—OLED displays
- H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
- H10K59/121—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays characterised by the geometry or disposition of pixel elements
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a display device equipped with a light-emitting element or an electro-optical element in a pixel.
- the present invention relates to a display device having a layer including an organic material, a fluorescent material, or a phosphorescent material in the light-emitting element.
- a display device having a light-emitting element which includes a layer of an organic material between a pair of electrodes and emits light when a current is supplied between the electrodes has been developed.
- Such a display device has an advantage in reducing thickness and weight, has high visibility due to the self-luminance, and has high response speed.
- power consumption of such a display device may potentially be made very small, it has been actively developed as a device of next generation, and some of such devices have been put into practical use.
- FIG 39 shows the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram which is established by COMMISSION INTERNATIONALE DE L'ECLAIRAGE (INTERNATIONAL COMMISSION ON ILLLTMINATION: CIE) managing standards of color internationally.
- a point which is near the rightmost end corresponds to an emission spectrum of 700 nm of red monochromatic light; a point which is near the uppermost end corresponds to an emission spectrum of 546.1 nm of green monochromatic light; and a point which is near the lowermost end corresponds to an emission spectrum of 435.8 nm of blue monochromatic light.
- brightness (chroma) is lower in the inner side since the outer boundary of the graph (a visible area) corresponds to an emission spectrum of monochromatic light while the inner side thereof corresponds to a combination color obtained by combining different kinds of monochromatic light.
- a plurality of standard colors can reproduce only a color which lies in a position surrounded with a polygon formed of points which are shown in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram.
- red (R) is shown by the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram
- human eyes can perceive a color which has a coordinate near a right region of the chromaticity diagram (a region surrounded with the circumference of the chromaticity diagram and a dotted line 3901 in FIG. 39 ) as red.
- green (G) is shown by the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram
- human eyes can perceive a color which has a coordinate near an upper region of the chromaticity diagram (a region surrounded with the circumference of the chromaticity diagram and a dotted line 3902 in FIG. 39 ) as green.
- blue (B) When blue (B) is shown by the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram, human eyes can perceive a color which has a coordinate near a lower region of the chromaticity diagram (a region surrounded with the circumference of the chromaticity diagram and dotted lines 3903 and 3904 in FIG. 39 ) as blue.
- a color reproduction area can be expanded in directions of arrows in FIG. 39 by increasing color purity, and brightness of colors recognized by human eyes can be increased.
- a surplus in a color gamut which can be viewed by human eyes Therefore, it is an essential task to expand the color reproduction area by satisfying the surplus in the color gamut which can be viewed by human eyes.
- a first set of primary colors are able to generate very saturated colors.
- the first set of primary colors defines a first color gamut.
- a second set of primary colors are located inside the first color gamut and defines a second color gamut and are all less saturated than the first set of primary colors.
- the second set of primary colors can generate very high brightness levels compared to the first set of primary colors.
- a full color display additionally includes at least one in-gamut OLED, for example, a white light-emitting element OLED.
- a display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements.
- Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively.
- the light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel have different emission spectrums from each other; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel have different emission spectrums from each other; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel have different emission spectrums from each other.
- a display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements.
- Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively.
- the light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel emit light with colors of different coordinates from each other in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel emit light with colors of different coordinates from each other in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel emit light with colors of different coordinates from each other in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram.
- a display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements.
- Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively.
- the light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel are formed of different materials from each other to have different emission spectrums; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel are formed of different materials from each other to have different emission spectrums; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel are formed of different materials from each other to have different emission spectrums.
- a display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements.
- Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively.
- the light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other to have different emission spectrums; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other to have different emission spectrums; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other to have different emission spectrums.
- a display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements.
- Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively.
- the first pixel and the second pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, thereby light which has traveled through each of the color filters has a different emission spectrum from each other; the third pixel and the fourth pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, thereby light which has traveled through each of the color filters has a different emission spectrum from each other; and the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, thereby light which has traveled through each of the color filters has a different emission spectrum from each other.
- a display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements.
- Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively.
- the light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel are formed of different materials from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel are formed of different materials from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel are formed of different materials from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram.
- a display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements.
- Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively.
- the light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram.
- a display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements.
- Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively.
- the first pixel and the second pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, and light that has traveled through one of the color filters has a color of a different coordinate from light that has traveled through the other color filter in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram;
- the third pixel and the fourth pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, and light that has traveled through one of the color filters has a color of a different coordinate from light that has traveled through the other color filter in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram;
- the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, and light that has traveled through one of the color filters has a color of a different coordinate from light that has traveled through the other color filter in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram.
- Either one of the light-emitting element provided in the first pixel or the light-emitting element provided in the second pixel may have a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.6 or more and 0.35 or less, respectively; either one of the light-emitting element provided in the third pixel or the light-emitting element provided in the fourth pixel may have a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.3 or less and 0.6 or more, respectively; and either one of the light-emitting element provided in the fifth pixel or the light-emitting element provided in the sixth pixel may have a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.15 or less and 0.2 or less, respectively.
- the picture element may include a light-emitting element which emits white light.
- the first pixel and the second pixel may have light-emitting regions with different area dimensions from each other; the third pixel and the fourth pixel may have light-emitting regions with different area dimensions from each other; and the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel may have light-emitting regions with different area dimensions from each other.
- the light-emitting element may be an electroluminescent (EL: Electro Luminescence) element (e.g., an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing organic and inorganic materials).
- EL Electro Luminescence
- a region in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram in this specification corresponds to a region showing visible light in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram which can be recognized by human eyes.
- a switch described in this specification can employ various types of elements.
- An electrical switch, a mechanical switch, or the like is given as an example. That is, anything that can control a current flow can be employed, and thus, various types of elements can be employed without limiting to a certain element.
- it may be a transistor, a diode (e.g., a PN junction diode, a PIN diode, a Schottky diode, or a diode-connected transistor), a thyristor, or a logic circuit combining such elements. Therefore, in the case of employing a transistor as a switch, the polarity (the conductivity type) of the transistor is not particularly limited to a certain type since it operates just as a switch.
- a transistor of a polarity with small off-current is desirably employed.
- a transistor with small off-current there is a transistor provided with an LDD region, a transistor with a multi-gate structure, or the like.
- an n-channel transistor be employed when a potential of a source terminal of the transistor being operated as a switch is closer to the low-potential-side power supply (e.g., Vss, GND, or 0 V)
- a p-channel transistor be employed when the potential of the source terminal is closer to the high-potential-side power supply (e.g., Vdd). This helps the switch operate efficiently since the absolute value of the gate-source voltage of the transistor can be increased.
- a CMOS switch may also be employed by using both n-channel and p-channel transistors.
- the switch can efficiently operate as a switch since current can flow when either one of the p-channel transistor or the n-channel transistor is turned on. For example, voltage can be appropriately output regardless of whether voltage of an input signal of the switch is high or low. Further, since a voltage amplitude value of a signal for turning on or off the switch can be suppressed, power consumption can be reduced.
- the switch When a transistor is employed as a switch, the switch includes an input terminal (one of either a source terminal or a drain terminal), an output terminal (the other of either the source terminal or the drain terminal), and a terminal for controlling electrical conduction (a gate terminal).
- the switch may not have a terminal for controlling electrical conduction. Therefore, the number of wires for controlling terminals can be reduced.
- the description "being connected” includes a case where elements are electrically connected, a case where elements are functionally connected, and a case where elements are directly connected. Accordingly, in the configurations disclosed in this specification, other elements may be sandwiched between elements having a predetermined connecting relation. For example, one or more elements which enable an electrical connection (e.g., a switch, a transistor, a capacitor t, an inductor, a resistor, or a diode) may be provided.
- an electrical connection e.g., a switch, a transistor, a capacitor t, an inductor, a resistor, or a diode
- one or more circuits which enable a functional connection may be provided in addition to the predetermined elements, such as a logic circuit (e.g., an inverter, a NAND circuit, or a NOR circuit), a signal converter circuit (e.g., a DA converter circuit, an AD converter circuit, or a gamma correction circuit), a potential level converter circuit (e.g., a power supply circuit such as a boosting circuit or a voltage lower control circuit, or a level shifter circuit for changing a potential level of an H signal or an L signal), a voltage source, a current source, a switching circuit, or an amplifier circuit (e.g., a circuit which can increase the signal amplitude, the amount of current, or the like, such as an operational amplifier, a differential amplifier circuit, a source follower circuit, or a buffer circuit), a signal generating circuit, a memory circuit, or a control circuit.
- the elements may be directly connected without interposing other elements or other circuits therebetween.
- transistors can be applied to a transistor. Therefore, types of transistors which can be applied are not limited to a certain type.
- a thin film transistor (TFT) including a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by amorphous silicon or polycrystalline silicon can be applied. Accordingly, various advantages can be provided that such transistors can be manufactured at a low manufacturing temperature, can be manufactured at low cost, can be formed over a large substrate as well as a light-transmissive substrate, and further, such transistors can transmit light.
- the transistors can be formed by using a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, or the like.
- a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like can be employed.
- transistors with few variations, transistors with a high current supply capacity, and transistors with a small size can be manufactured, and thereby a circuit with low power consumption can be constructed by using such transistors.
- a transistor including a compound semiconductor such as ZnO, a-InGaZnO, SiGe, or GaAs, or a thin film transistor obtained by thinning such compound semiconductors can be employed. Accordingly, such transistors can be manufactured at a low manufacturing temperature, can be manufactured at a room temperature, and can be formed directly over a low heat-resistant substrate such as a plastic substrate or a film substrate. A transistor or the like formed by ink-jet method or a printing method may also be employed.
- transistors can be manufactured at a room temperature, can be manufactured at a low vacuum, and can be manufactured over a large substrate.
- the layout of the transistors can be easily changed.
- a transistor including an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or other transistors can be applied as well. Accordingly, the transistors can be formed over a substrate which can be bent.
- a non-single crystalline semiconductor film may include hydrogen or halogen.
- various types of substrates can be applied to a substrate over which transistors are formed without limiting to a certain type.
- transistors may be formed over, for example, a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a stainless steel substrate, a substrate made of a stainless steel foil, or the like.
- the transistors may be transposed onto another substrate.
- a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a stainless steel substrate, a substrate made of a stainless steel foil, or the like may be employed.
- the structure of a transistor may be various modes. Therefore, the structure of the transistor is not limited to a certain type.
- a multi-gate structure having two or more gate electrodes may be used.
- a structure where channel regions are connected in series is provided; therefore, a structure where a plurality of transistors are connected in series is provided.
- off-current can be reduced as well as the withstand voltage can be increased to improve the reliability of the transistor, and even if a drain-source voltage fluctuates when the transistor operates in the saturation region, flat characteristics can be provided without causing fluctuations of drain-source current very much.
- a structure where gate electrodes are formed above and below a channel may be employed.
- the channel region is enlarged to increase the amount of current flowing therethrough, and a depletion layer can be easily formed to improve the S value.
- gate electrodes are formed above and below a channel, a structure where a plurality of transistors are connected in parallel is provided.
- any of the following structures may be employed: a structure where a gate electrode is formed above a channel; a structure where a gate electrode is formed below a channel; a staggered structure; an inversely staggered structure; and a structure where a channel region is divided into a plurality of regions, and the divided regions are connected in parallel or in series.
- a channel (or a part of it) may overlap with a source electrode or a drain electrode.
- an LDD (Lightly Doped Drain) region may be provided.
- off-current can be reduced as well as the withstand voltage can be increased to improve the reliability of the transistor, and even if a drain-source voltage fluctuates when the transistor operates in the saturation region, flat characteristics can be provided without causing fluctuations of a drain-source current very much.
- transistors may be employed in this specification, and such transistors can be formed over various types of substrates. Accordingly, all of the circuits may be formed over a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, or any other substrates. By forming all of the circuits over the same substrate, the number of component parts can be reduced to cut cost, as well as the number of connections to the circuit components can be reduced to improve the reliability. Alternatively, parts of the circuits may be formed over one substrate while the other parts of the circuits may be formed over another substrate. That is, not all of the circuits are required to be formed over the same substrate.
- parts of the circuits may be formed with transistors over a glass substrate while the other parts of the circuits may be formed over a single crystalline substrate, so that the IC chip is connected to the glass substrate by COG (Chip On Glass).
- the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate by TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed wiring board.
- TAB Tape Automated Bonding
- the number of component parts can be reduced to cut cost, as well as the number of connections to the circuit components can be reduced to improve the reliability.
- by forming a portion with a high driving voltage or a portion with high driving frequency which would consume large power over another substrate increase of power consumption can be prevented.
- a transistor is an element having at least three terminals of a gate, a drain, and a source.
- the transistor has a channel region between a drain region and a source region, and can supply a current through the drain region, the channel region, and the source region.
- the source and the drain of the transistor may change depending on the structure, the operating conditions, and the like of the transistor, it is difficult to define which is a source or a drain. Therefore, in the invention, a region functioning as a source and a drain may not be called the source or the drain. In such a case, for example, one of the source and the drain may be called a first terminal and the other terminal may be called a second terminal.
- a transistor may be an element having at least three terminals of a base, an emitter, and a collector.
- one of the emitter and the collector may be similarly called a first terminal and the other terminal may be called a second terminal.
- a gate means all of or a part of a gate electrode and a gate wire (also called a gate line, a gate signal line, or the like).
- a gate electrode means a conductive film which overlaps with a semiconductor forming a channel region, an LDD region, or the like with a gate insulating film sandwiched therebetween.
- a gate wire means a wire for connecting each gate electrode of each pixel, or a wire for connecting a gate electrode to another wire.
- Such a region may be called either a gate electrode or a gate wire. That is, there is a region where a gate electrode and a gate wire cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. For example, in the case where a channel region overlaps with an extended gate wire, the overlapped region functions as both a gate wire and a gate electrode. Accordingly, such a region may be called either a gate electrode or a gate wire.
- a region formed of the same material as a gate electrode and connected to the gate electrode may also be called a gate electrode.
- a region formed of the same material as a gate wire and connected to the gate wire may also be called a gate wire.
- such a region may not overlap with a channel region, or may not have a function of connecting to another gate electrode.
- a gate electrode of one transistor is often connected to a gate electrode of another transistor by using a conductive film which is formed of the same material as the gate electrode. Since such a region is a region for connecting a gate electrode to another gate electrode, it may be called a gate wire, while it may also be called a gate electrode since a multi-gate transistor can be considered as one transistor. That is, a region which is formed of the same material as a gate electrode or a gate wire and connected thereto may be called either the gate electrode or the gate wire.
- a part of a conductive film which connects a gate electrode and a gate wire may also be called either a gate electrode or a gate wire.
- a gate terminal means a part of a gate electrode or a part of a region which is electrically connected to the gate electrode.
- a source means all of or a part of a source region, a source electrode, and a source wire (also called a source line, a source signal line, or the like).
- a source region means a semiconductor region containing a large amount of p-type impurities (e.g., boron or gallium) or n-type impurities (e.g., phosphorus or arsenic). Accordingly, a region containing a slight amount of p-type impurities or n-type impurities, namely, an LDD (Lightly Doped Drain) region is not included in the source region.
- a source electrode is a part of a conductive layer formed of a different material from a source region, and electrically connected to the source region. However, there is a case where a source electrode and a source region are collectively called a source electrode.
- a source wire is a wire for connecting each source electrode of each pixel, or a wire for connecting a source electrode to another wire.
- Such a region may be called either a source electrode or a source wire. That is, there is a region where a source electrode and a source wire cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. For example, in the case where a source region overlaps with an extended source wire, the overlapped region functions as both a source wire and a source electrode. Accordingly, such a region may be called either a source electrode or a source wire.
- a region formed of the same material as a source electrode and connected to the source electrode, or a portion for connecting a source electrode to another source electrode may be called a source electrode.
- a part of a source wire which overlaps with a source region may also be called a source electrode.
- a region formed of the same material as a source wire and connected to the source wire may be called a source wire. In a strict sense, such a region may not have a function of connecting to another source electrode.
- a part of a conductive film which connects a source electrode and a source wire may be called either a source electrode or a source wire.
- a source terminal means a part of a source region, a part of a source electrode, or a part of a region electrically connected to the source electrode.
- a semiconductor device means a device having a circuit including semiconductor elements (e.g., transistors or diodes).
- the semiconductor device may also include all devices that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics.
- a display device means a device having display elements (e.g., liquid crystal elements or light-emitting elements).
- the display device may also include a display panel itself where a plurality of pixels including display elements such as liquid crystal elements or EL elements are formed over the same substrate as a peripheral driver circuit for driving the pixels.
- the display device may include a peripheral driver circuit disposed over the substrate by wire bonding or bump bonding, namely, chip-on-glass (COG).
- the display device may include a flexible printed circuit (FPC) or a printed wiring board (PWB) attached to the display panel (e.g., an IC, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, or a transistor).
- FPC flexible printed circuit
- PWB printed wiring board
- Such a display device may also include an optical sheet such as a polarizing plate or a retardation plate. Further, the display device may include a backlight unit (which may include a light conducting plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, and a light source (e.g., an LED or a cold cathode tube)).
- a light-emitting device means a display device having self-luminous display elements, particularly, such as EL elements or elements used for an FED.
- a liquid crystal display device means a display device having liquid crystal elements.
- a display element, a display device, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device may include various types of modes and various elements.
- a display medium whose contrast changes by an electromagnetic action, such as an EL element (e.g., an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing both organic and inorganic materials); an electron-emissive element; a liquid crystal element; electronic ink; a grating light valve (GLV); a plasma display (PDP); a digital micromirror device (DMD); a piezoelectric ceramic element; or a carbon nanotube.
- an EL element e.g., an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing both organic and inorganic materials
- an electron-emissive element e.g., an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing both organic and inorganic materials
- an electron-emissive element e.g
- a display device using an EL element includes an EL display; a display device using an electron-emissive element includes a field emission display (FED), an SED-type flat panel display (SED: Surface-conduction Electron-emitter Display), or the like; a display device using a liquid crystal element includes a liquid crystal display, a transmissive liquid crystal display, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, and a reflective liquid crystal display; and a display device using electronic ink includes electronic paper.
- FED field emission display
- SED SED-type flat panel display
- a display device using a liquid crystal element includes a liquid crystal display, a transmissive liquid crystal display, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, and a reflective liquid crystal display
- a display device using electronic ink includes electronic paper.
- an expression that an object is "formed on” or “formed above” another object does not necessarily mean that the object is in direct contact with another object.
- the expression may include a case where two objects are not in direct contact with each other, that is, a case where another object is sandwiched therebetween. Accordingly, when it is described that a layer B is formed on (above) a layer A, it means either a case where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A, or a case where another layer (e.g., a layer C or a layer D) is formed in direct contact with the layer A, and then the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer C or D.
- an object when it is described that an object is formed over another object, it does not necessarily mean that the object is in direct contact with another object, and another object may be sandwiched therebetween. Accordingly, for example, when it is described that a layer B is formed over or above a layer A, it means either a case where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A, or a case where another layer (e.g., a layer C or a layer D) is formed in direct contact with the layer A, and then the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer C or D. Similarly, when it is described that an object is formed below or under another object, it means either a case where the objects are in direct contact with each other or a case where the objects are not in contact with each other.
- a layer B when it is described that a layer B is formed over or above a layer A, it means either a case where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A, or a case where another layer (e.g., a layer C or a layer D)
- the invention can provide a display device having an improved color reproduction area on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram in a display device using light-emitting elements.
- the invention can provide a display device which can express bright colors.
- FIG 1 A configuration example of a display device in the invention is shown by a block diagram in FIG 1 .
- Reference numeral 100 denotes a pixel portion where a plurality of pixels 101 are arranged in matrix, and such a configuration is called an active matrix arrangement.
- reference numeral 102 denotes a signal line driver circuit and 103 denotes a scan line driver circuit.
- the signal line driver circuit 102 and the scan line driver circuit 103 are formed over the same substrate as a pixel portion 100 in FIG. 1 ; however, the configuration of the invention is not limited to this.
- the signal line driver circuit 102 and the scan line driver circuit 103 may be formed over a different substrate from the pixel portion 100, and connected to the pixel portion 100 with a connector such as a flexible printed circuit (FPC).
- FPC flexible printed circuit
- a connecting method using an anisotropic conductive material or a metal bump, or a wire bonding method can be employed.
- each of the signal line driver circuit 102 and the scan line driver circuit 103 is provided one by one in FIG. 1 ; however, the configuration of the invention is not limited to this.
- the number of the signal line driver circuit 102 and the scan line driver circuit 103 can be set arbitrarily by a designer.
- a pixel means an element having a color element forming one image, and includes a light-emitting element and an element which drives the light-emitting element (e.g., a circuit constructed from transistors) in this specification.
- a picture element means an element having pixels each having a color element for displaying one minimum image. Accordingly, in the case of a full color display device having color elements of R (Red), G (Green), and B (Blue), a picture element includes pixels including color elements of R, G, and B. Further, with regard to a picture element which includes a plurality of pixels, pixels are called in such order that a first pixel and a second pixel. In addition, each pixel may have a different area dimension.
- connection means an electrical connection unless otherwise specified.
- separation means a state where objects are not connected and electrically separated.
- signal lines S1 to Sn, power supply lines V1 to Vn, and scan lines G1 to Gm are provided in the pixel portion 100. Note that the number of the signal lines and the scan lines is not necessarily the same. Further, the pixel portion 100 is not necessarily required to include all of the wires, and another wire may be provided therein in addition to these wires.
- the signal line driver circuit 102 may be any kind of circuits as long as it can supply an input signal to each of the signal lines S1 to Sn.
- the signal line driver circuit 102 includes a shift register 102a, a first latch circuit 102b, and a second latch circuit 102c. Note that the signal line driver circuit 102 of a display device in the invention is not limited to the aforementioned configuration.
- the signal line driver circuit 102 may be a signal line driver circuit which can process a video signal in a digital form (also called a digital video signal or a video signal), or a signal line driver circuit which outputs a video signal in an analog form (an analog video signal) by using a D/A (Digital-Analog) converter circuit.
- the signal line driver circuit 102 may have a configuration including a level shifter circuit, a buffer circuit, or the like depending on the configurations of the display device.
- the scan line driver circuit 103 may be any kind of circuit as long as it can output a signal to each of the scan lines G1 to Gm in order to select a pixel in the pixel portion 100.
- the scan line driver circuit 103 includes a shift register circuit in this embodiment mode.
- the scan line driver circuit 103 may have a configuration including a level shifter circuit, a buffer circuit, or the like depending on the configurations of the display device.
- the scan line driver circuit 103 may be constructed with a shift register and a sampling switch without using a latch circuit.
- a clock signal (S_CLK), a clock inverted signal (S_CLKB), a start pulse (S_SP), a digital video signal (Digital Video Data), a latch signal (Latch Signal), and the like are input to the signal line driver circuit 102. Then, in accordance with the signals, a video signal corresponding to pixels of each column is output to each of the signal lines S1 to Sn. Note that an analog video signal may be input to the signal line driver circuit 102.
- a clock signal (S_CLK), a clock inverted signal (S_CLKB), a start pulse (S_SP), and the like are input to the scan line driver circuit 103. Then, in accordance with the signals, a signal which selects pixels is output to a scan line Gi (one of the first scan lines G1 to Gm) of pixel columns which are selected.
- the video signal input to the signal lines S1 to Sn is written to each column of the pixels 101 in a row selected by the signal which is input to the scan line Gi (one of the first scan lines G1 to Gm) from the scan line driver circuit 103. Then, each pixel column is selected by each of the scan lines G1 to Gm and a video signal corresponding to each pixel is written to each pixel. Then, each pixel holds the video signal that has been written for a certain period. By holding the video signal for a certain period, each pixel can maintain a state of lighting or the like.
- the display device using light-emitting elements shown in FIG. 1 is described based on an active matrix driving method; however, the invention is not limited to this.
- a simple (passive) matrix method may also be employed in the invention.
- the display device using the active matrix method shown in FIG. 1 includes a control circuit having a thin film transistor for switching in each pixel, and states of lighting and non-lighting of each pixel are controlled by the control circuit in each pixel.
- a display device using the simple (passive) matrix method is arranged such that a plurality of column signal lines and a plurality of row signal lines are crossed with each other, and light-emitting elements are sandwiched at the crossed portion.
- the light-emitting element emits light with a current flowing thereto.
- FIG 46 A configuration of a display device using the passive matrix method is shown in FIG 46 .
- the display device shown in FIG 46 includes a column signal line driver circuit 4601, a row signal line driver circuit 4602, and a pixel portion 4603.
- the pixel portion 4603 is provided with column signal lines S1 to Sn and row signal lines V1 to Vn, and has a plurality of light-emitting elements 4604 between the column signals S1 to Sn and the row signals V1 to Vn.
- the configurations of the invention can be simplified compared with the case of employing the active matrix method, and thus, it is preferable.
- FIG. 2 A specific configuration of the pixel portion in the invention shown in FIG. 1 is shown in FIG. 2 .
- each of a first pixel 201, a second pixel 202, a third pixel 203, a fourth pixel 204, a fifth pixel 205, and a sixth pixel 206 corresponds to the pixel 101 in FIG. 1 .
- a picture element 200 which displays one minimum image is formed by combining the first pixel 201 to the sixth pixel 206.
- Each of the first pixel 201, the second pixel 202, the third pixel 203, the fourth pixel 204, the fifth pixel 205, and the sixth pixel 206 has a light-emitting element.
- a light-emitting element R1, a light-emitting element R2, a light-emitting element G1, a light-emitting element G2, a light-emitting element B1, and a light-emitting element B2 are connected to the first pixel 201, the second pixel 202, the third pixel 203, the fourth pixel 204, the fifth pixel 205, and the sixth pixel 206, respectively.
- the light-emitting element R1 of the first pixel 201 and the light-emitting element R2 of the second pixel 202 have chromaticity whose x-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more.
- the light-emitting element G1 of the third pixel 203 and the light-emitting element G2 of the fourth pixel 204 have chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more.
- the light-emitting element B1 of the fifth pixel 205 and the light-emitting element B2 of the sixth pixel 206 have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.35 or less, respectively. More preferably, either one of the light-emitting element R1 of the first pixel 201 or the light-emitting element R2 of the second pixel 202 has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.60 or more and 0.35 or less, respectively.
- either one of the light-emitting element G1 of the third pixel 203 or the light-emitting element G2 of the fourth pixel 204 has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.30 or less and 0.60 or more, respectively.
- either one of the light-emitting element B1 of the fifth pixel 205 or the light-emitting element B2 of the sixth pixel 206 has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.15 or less and 0.20 or less, respectively.
- the absolute value G 12 which represents the difference between the coordinates (the distance between the coordinates of x and y) of the light-emitting element G1 and the light-emitting element G2 in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is preferably larger than the absolute value R 12 which represents the difference between the coordinates of the light-emitting element R1 and the light-emitting element R2 in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram, or the absolute value B 12 which represents the difference between the coordinates of the light-emitting element B1 and the light-emitting element B2 in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram.
- a region in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram in this specification corresponds to a region showing visible light which can be recognized by human eyes. That is, a region in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram in this specification corresponds to an inner region surrounded by a thick line in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram shown in FIG. 39 .
- Each of the first pixel 201, the second pixel 202, the third pixel 203, the fourth pixel 204, the fifth pixel 205, and the sixth pixel 206 shown in FIG. 2 includes a signal line Si (one of the signal lines S1 to Sn), a scan line Gi (one of the scan lines G1 to Gm), and a power supply line Vi (one of the power supply lines V1 to Vn).
- each of the first pixel 201, the second pixel 202, the third pixel 203, the fourth pixel 204, the fifth pixel 205, and the sixth pixel 206 includes a first transistor 301 for switching to control an input of a video signal, a second transistor 302 for driving to decide the state of lighting or non-lighting of a light-emitting element by the video signal, a light-emitting element 303, and a storage capacitor 304.
- the storage capacitor 304 is provided so as to hold a gate-source voltage (gate voltage) of the second transistor 302 more accurately; however, it is not necessarily required. Note that in this specification, voltage means a potential difference from a ground unless otherwise specified.
- the light-emitting element 303 corresponds to the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2 in FIG. 2 , and each light-emitting element is connected to a circuit which drives the light-emitting element.
- the power supply line can be shared to supply currents to the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, or the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 by using the same power supply line Vi.
- the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 have almost the same tone of color, respectively, the light-emitting elements can share the power supply line in this manner. As a result, the number of power supply lines disposed in the display device can be reduced, which is preferable.
- power supply lines which are connected to the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2, respectively, are described as different wires; however, the power supply lines may be wires diverged from the same wire.
- FIG. 52 A configuration different from the configuration shown in FIG. 3 is shown in FIG. 52 .
- a configuration having the same function as that of FIG. 3 is denoted by the same reference numeral.
- a configuration where the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 are connected to different second power supply lines Vi 2 , respectively may be employed.
- a voltage which is applied to the respective light-emitting elements can be controlled; thereby the luminance of each light-emitting element can be controlled freely, and thus, it is preferable.
- a circuit connected to a light-emitting element 404 includes a first transistor 401 for switching to control an input of a video signal, a second transistor 402 for driving to decide the light intensity of the light-emitting element 404 by the video signal, a signal line 405, a power supply line 406, and a scan line 407.
- a gate of the first transistor 401 is connected to the scan line 407.
- One of either a first terminal or a second terminal (a source or a drain) of the first transistor 401 is connected to the signal line 405 and the other is connected to a gate of the second transistor 402.
- the light-emitting element 404 includes an anode and a cathode, and in this specification, in the case where the anode is used as the pixel electrode, the cathode is called the opposite electrode; while in the case where the cathode is used as the pixel electrode, the anode is called the opposite electrode. Voltage of the opposite electrode is often kept at a constant level.
- the first transistor 401 and the second transistor 402 may be either an n-channel transistor or a p-channel transistor.
- the second transistor 402 is preferably a p-channel transistor.
- the second transistor 402 is preferably an n-channel transistor.
- One of two electrodes of the storage capacitor 403 is connected to the gate of the second transistor 402.
- the other of the two electrodes of the storage capacitor 403 is connected to the power source line 406; however, the invention is not limited to this, and the other of the two electrodes of the storage capacitor 403 may be connected to another wire.
- the storage capacitor 403 is provided so as to hold a gate-source voltage (gate voltage) of the second transistor 402 more accurately; however, it is not necessarily required by substituting the gate capacitance of the second transistor 402.
- the pixel configuration is not limited to this.
- Various types of pixel configurations can be applied such as a method for compensating variations of the threshold voltage of transistors and a method for inputting a signal current to the pixel.
- the display device conducts rewriting and displaying of images repeatedly in a displaying period.
- the number of rewriting of images is generally set about 60 times per second so that a viewer does not perceive a flicker.
- a period in which a series operation of rewriting and displaying images is conducted once that is, a period shown by 501 in FIG. 5 is described as one frame period 501.
- a case where a 3-bit digital video signal is used in a digital time gray scale method is given as an example.
- the one frame period 501 is further divided into a plurality of sub frame periods.
- the one frame period 501 is divided into three sub frame periods, and writing and displaying images for each luminous color are conducted in each period.
- Each sub frame period includes an address (writing) period Ta# (# is a natural number) and a sustain (light-emitting) period Ts#.
- a light-emitting element emits light only in Ts3, and a light-emitting element does not emit light in Ts1 and Ts2
- light emission is obtained only in about 14% of all of the sustain (light-emitting) periods. That is, luminance of about 14% can be expressed.
- a light-emitting element emits light in Ts1 and Ts2, and a light-emitting element does not emit light in Ts3
- light emission is obtained in about 86% of all of the sustain (light-emitting) periods. That is, luminance of about 86% can be expressed.
- Each of the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2 which corresponds to the light-emitting element 303 in FIG. 3 is driven by this operation.
- light-emitting periods of light-emitting elements which are provided in the respective pixels in the picture element 200 in FIG. 3 are controlled independently by circuits connected to the respective light-emitting elements, and thus, a desired display color can be obtained.
- a display color means a color which can be visually recognized as a mixed color where luminescences obtained from a plurality of light-emitting elements each having a different luminous color in one pixel are mixed.
- luminance of the light-emitting element 404 may be changed in an analog manner in response to the analog signal.
- FIGS. 6A and 6B examples of light-emitting elements which can be applied to the display device of the invention are shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B .
- a light-emitting element shown in FIG. 6A has an element structure where a substrate 601, an anode 602, a hole inject layer 603 which is made of a hole inject material, a hole transport layer 604 which is made of a hole transport material, a light-emitting layer 605, an electron transport layer 606 which is made of an electron transport material, an electron inject layer 607 which is made of an electron inject material, and a cathode 608 are stacked in this order.
- the light-emitting layer 605 may be formed of only one kind of a light-emitting material or may be formed of two or more kinds of light-emitting materials.
- the structure of the light-emitting element in the invention is not limited to this. Needless to say, a circuit or a wire for driving a light-emitting element which is constructed with a transistor may be provided between the substrate 601 and the anode 602.
- each functional layer is stacked
- element structures such as an element using a high molecular compound, and a high efficiency element which utilizes, as a light-emitting layer, a triplet light-emitting material which emits light in returning from a triplet excitation state.
- the light-emitting element can also be applied to a white light-emitting element which can be obtained by controlling a recombination region of carries using a hole blocking layer and dividing a light-emitting region into two regions.
- the element of the invention shown in FIG. 6A can be manufactured as follows. First, a hole inject material, a hole transport material, and a light-emitting material are sequentially deposited over the substrate 601 having the anode 602 (ITO: Indium Tin Oxide). Next, an electron transport material and an electron inject material are deposited, and finally the cathode 608 is formed by vapor-deposition.
- ITO Indium Tin Oxide
- the hole generation layer means layer which generates a hole, and can be formed by mixing at least one material selected from the hole transport materials and a material showing an electron-accepting property to the hole transport materials.
- a hole transport material a material similar to a material which can be used for forming the hole transport material can be employed.
- metal oxide such as a molybdenum oxide, a vanadium oxide, a ruthenium oxide, or a rhenium oxide can be employed.
- a phthalocyanine-based compound such as phthalocyanine (abbreviation: H 2 Pc) or copper phthalocyanine (abbreviation: CuPc), a polymer such as a poly(polyethylene dioxythiophene)/poly(polystylene sulfonate) solution (abbreviation: PEDOT/PSS), or the like can be given.
- the hole inject layer can be formed by selecting a material with a hole transport property which has a relatively lower ionization potential than an ionization potential of a functional layer which is formed to be in contact with the opposite side of an electrode functioning as an anode.
- NPB 4,4'-bis[ N -(1-naphthyl)- N -phenylamino]biphenyl
- TPD 4,4'-bis[ N- (3-methylphenyl)- N -phenylamino]biphenyl
- TDATA 4,4',4"-tris( N , N- diphenylamino)triphenylamine
- MTDATA 4,4',4"-tris[ N -(3-methylphenyl)- N- phenylamino]triphenylamine
- DNTPD 4,4'-bis ⁇ N -[4-( N , N -di-m-tolylamino)phenyl]- N -phenylamino ⁇ biphenyl
- DNTPD 1,3,5-tris[ N , N- di(m-toly
- an inorganic material such as alkaline metal, alkaline earth metal, alkaline metal fluoride, alkaline earth metal fluoride, alkaline metal oxide, or alkaline earth metal oxide is given as an example.
- a material which can be used for forming the electron transport layer such as BPhen, BCP, p-EtTAZ, TAZ, or BzOs can be employed as the material for forming the electron inject layer by selecting from the aforementioned materials a material having a higher electron affinity than the material which is used for forming the electron transport layer. That is, the electron inject layer can also be formed by selecting from materials having electron transport properties a material having relatively a higher electron affinity in the electron inject layer than the electron affinity in the electron transport layer.
- a material which has excellent luminous efficiency and can emit light with a desired emission wavelength may be selected to be employed without limiting to a certain light-emitting material.
- a material which presents light emission having an emission spectrum with a peak of 600 to 680 nm such as 4-dicyanomethylene-2-isopropyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-9-julolidyl)ethenyl]-4 H- pyra n (abbreviation: DCJTI), 4-dicyanomethylene-2-methyl-6-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyljulolidyl-9-enyl)-4 H -pyran (abbreviation: DCJT), 4-dicyanomethylene-2- tert -butyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-9-julolidyl)ethenyl]-4 H-
- N N "-dimethylquinacridone (abbreviation: DMQd), Coumarin 6, Coumarin 545T, or tris(8-quinolinolato) aluminum (abbreviation: Alq 3 )
- DMQd N "-dimethylquinacridone
- Coumarin 6, Coumarin 545T or tris(8-quinolinolato) aluminum
- a material which presents light emission having an emission spectrum with a peak of 420 to 500 nm such as 2- tert -butyl-9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: t-BuDNA), 9,10-diphenylanthracene (abbreviation: DPA), 9,10-di(2-naphthyl) anthracene (abbreviation: DNA), bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)-4-phenylphenolato-gallium (abbreviation: BGaq), or bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)(4-phenylphenolato)aluminum (abbreviation: BAlq) can be employed.
- materials which emit fluorescence materials which emit phosphorescence such as tris(2-phenylpyridine)iridium may also be employed.
- a material used for making the light-emitting material into the dispersion state is not limited to a certain material.
- a compound having an arylamine skeleton such as 4,4'-bis[ N -(1-naphthyl)- N- phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: ⁇ -NPD)
- a carbazole derivative such as 4,4'-bis( N- carbazolyl)biphenyl (abbreviation: CBP) or 4,4',4"-tri( N- carbazolyl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: TCTA)
- a metal complex such as bis[2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)pyridinato]zinc (abbreviation: Znpp 2 ), bis[2-(2'-hydroxypheyl)benzoxazolato]zinc (abbreviation: Zn(BOX) 2 ), or tris(8-quinolinolato) aluminum (abbre
- the light-emitting element shown in FIG 6B has an element structure where a substrate 601, a cathode 608, an electron inject layer 607 which is made of an electron inject material, an electron transport layer 606 which is made of an electron transport material, a light-emitting layer 605, a hole transport layer 604 which is made of a hole transport material, a hole inject layer 603 which is made of a hole inject material, and an anode 602 are stacked in this order.
- At least one of the anode and the cathode of the light-emitting elements is required to be transparent.
- a TFT and the light-emitting element are formed over a substrate; and there are light-emitting elements having a top emission structure where light emission is extracted through a surface on the side opposite to the substrate, having a bottom emission structure where light emission is extracted through a surface on the substrate side, and a dual emission structure where light emission is extracted through both the surface on the side opposite to the substrate and the surface on the substrate side.
- the pixel configuration of the invention can be applied to the light-emitting elements having any emission structure.
- the light-emitting elements of the invention can be manufactured.
- FIGS. 7A to 7C examples of a top emission structure, a bottom emission structure, and a dual emission structure of light-emitting elements which can be applied to the display device of the invention are shown FIGS. 7A to 7C .
- FIG. 7A A light-emitting element with the top emission structure is shown in FIG. 7A .
- a driving TFT 701 is formed over a substrate 700, a first electrode 702 is formed to be connected to a source electrode of the driving TFT 701, and a light-emitting layer 703 and a second electrode 704 are formed over the first electrode 702.
- the first electrode 702 is an anode of the light-emitting element while the second electrode 704 is a cathode of the light-emitting element. That is, the portion where the light-emitting layer 703 is sandwiched between the first electrode 702 and the second electrode 704 corresponds to the light-emitting element.
- a material used for the first electrode 702 functioning as the anode a material having a high work function is preferably employed.
- a material having a high work function is preferably employed.
- stacked layers of a titanium nitride film and a film containing aluminum as a main component a three-layer structure of a titanium nitride film, a film containing aluminum as a main component, and a titanium nitride film can be employed.
- a material used for the second electrode 704 functioning as the cathode stacked layers of a thin metal film formed of a material having a low work function (Al, Ag, Li, Ca, or an alloy of these such as MgAg, MgIn, AlLi, CaF 2 , or calcium nitride) and a transparent conductive film (of ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), indium zinc oxide (IZO), zinc oxide (ZnO), or the like) is preferably employed.
- a transparent conductive film of ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), indium zinc oxide (IZO), zinc oxide (ZnO), or the like.
- the light-emitting element with the bottom emission structure is shown in FIG. 7B . Since the light-emitting element of the bottom emission structure is the same as the light-emitting element with the structure in FIG 7A other than the emission structure, description is made with the same numerals as those in FIG 7A .
- a material used for the first electrode 702 functioning as the anode a material having a high work function is desirably employed.
- a transparent conductive film such as an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) film or an indium zinc oxide (IZO) film can be employed.
- ITO Indium Tin Oxide
- IZO indium zinc oxide
- a metal film formed of a material having a low work function Al, Ag, Li, Ca, or an alloy of these such as MgAg, MgIn, AlLi, CaF 2 , or calcium nitride
- a metal film which reflects light in this manner a cathode which does not transmit light can be obtained.
- the light-emitting element with the dual emission structure is shown in FIG. 7C . Since the light-emitting element with the dual emission structure is the same as the light-emitting element with the structure in FIG. 7A other than the emission structure, description is made with the same numerals as those in FIG 7A .
- a material used for the first electrode 702 functioning as the anode a material having a high work function is desirably employed.
- a transparent conductive film such as an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) film or an indium zinc oxide (IZO) film can be employed.
- ITO Indium Tin Oxide
- IZO indium zinc oxide
- a material used for the second electrode 704 functioning as the cathode stacked layers of a thin metal film formed of a material having a low work function (Al, Ag, Li, Ca, or an alloy of these such as MgAg, MgIn, AlLi, CaF 2 , or calcium nitride) and a transparent conductive film (of ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), indium oxide zinc oxide alloy (In 2 O 3 -ZnO), zinc oxide (ZnO), or the like) is preferably employed.
- a transparent conductive film having transparency By using a thin metal film and a transparent conductive film having transparency in this manner, a cathode which can transmit light can be formed.
- the aforementioned emission structures can be employed for the display device of the invention.
- emission structures shown in FIGS. 7A to 7C another emission structure having more interlayer films can also be employed.
- FIG. 51A a structure of a light-emitting element with a top emission structure is shown as an example.
- the structure shown in FIG 51A is different from FIG. 7A in that a single-layered interlayer insulating film 5101 and a wire 5102 for being connected to a first electrode are provided.
- a film having planarity for the interlayer insulating film 5101 disconnection of wires or the like due to steps of the interlayer film can be preferably reduced, for example, in the first electrode or the like provided over the interlayer insulating film 5101.
- a structure where a first reflecting electrode 5103 which is made of the same material as a gate electrode and a second reflecting electrode 5104 which is made of the same material as source and drain electrodes are provided below the light-emitting element is preferably employed.
- efficiency of light extraction is bad since light emitted below the light-emitting element is not emitted to the viewer's side.
- the first reflecting electrode 5103 and the second reflecting electrode 5104 are provided, more light can be emitted through the top surface of the light-emitting element, and thus, it is preferable.
- the aforementioned emission structures can be employed for the display device of the invention.
- the picture element of the invention includes the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel in FIG 2 .
- a light-emitting element is provided in each of the first pixel to the sixth pixel, such that the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G1, the light-emitting element G2, the light-emitting element B1, and the light-emitting element B2 are connected to the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel, respectively.
- the light-emitting element R1 of the first pixel and the light-emitting element R2 of the second pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose x-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more.
- the light-emitting element G1 of the third pixel and the light-emitting element G2 of the fourth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more.
- the light-emitting element B1 of the fifth pixel and the light-emitting element B2 of the sixth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.15 or less and 0.20 or less, respectively.
- Either one of the light-emitting element of the first pixel or the light-emitting element of the second pixel has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.60 or more and 0.35 or less, respectively; either one of the light-emitting element of the third pixel or the light-emitting element of the fourth pixel has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.30 or less and 0.60 or more, respectively; either one of the light-emitting element of the fifth pixel or the light-emitting element of the sixth pixel has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.15 or less and 0.20 or less, respectively.
- a display device having a more improved color reproduction area on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram can be obtained.
- a specific element structure of the light-emitting element R1 which is provided in the first pixel is described.
- CuPu having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm;
- NPB having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a hole transport layer;
- a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating 2,3-bis(4-diphenylaminophenyl)quinoxaline (abbreviation: TPAQn) which is a host material and bis[2-(2'-benzothienyl)pyridinato- N , C 3']iridium(acetylacetonate) (abbreviation: Ir(btp)2(acac);
- BAlq having a thickness of 10 nm is formed as an electron transport layer;
- Alq having a thickness of 20 nm is formed;
- CuPu having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm; NPB having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a hole transport layer; a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating TPAQn which is a host material and rubrene; BAlq having a thickness of 10 nm is formed as an electron transport layer; Alq having a thickness of 20 nm is formed; calcium fluoride having a thickness of 2 nm is formed as an electron inject layer; and Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially. Note that the ratio of TPAQn to rubrene in the light-emitting layer is controlled so that rubrene has a concentration of 10wt%.
- FIG 8 shows an emission spectrum 801 of the light-emitting element R1 manufactured as above and an emission spectrum 802 of the light-emitting element R2 manufactured as above.
- the emission spectrums in FIG. 8 correspond to emission spectrums when current is supplied to the light-emitting elements with a current density of 25 mA/cm 2 .
- the emission spectrum 802 of the light-emitting element R2 is located in a position which is shifted to the short-wavelength side of the emission spectrum 801 of the light-emitting element R1 in FIG. 8 .
- DNTPD having a thickness of 50 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm
- NPB having a thickness of 10 nm is formed as a hole transport layer
- a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 37.5 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating Alq which is a host material and Coumarin 6
- Alq having a thickness of 37.5 nm is formed as an electron transport layer
- calcium fluoride having a thickness of 2 nm is formed as an electron inject layer
- Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially. Note that the ratio of Alq to Coumarin 6 in the light-emitting layer is controlled so that Coumarin 6 has a concentration of 0.3wt%.
- DNTPD having a thickness of 50 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm
- NPB having a thickness of 10 nm is formed as a hole transport layer
- a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 37.5 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating Alq which is a host material and DMQd
- Alq having a thickness of 37.5 nm is formed as an electron transport layer
- calcium fluoride having a thickness of 2 nm is formed as an electron inject layer
- Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially.
- the ratio of Alq to DMQd in the light-emitting layer is controlled so that DMQd has a concentration of 0.3wt%.
- FIG 9 shows an emission spectrum 901 of the light-emitting element G1 manufactured as above and an emission spectrum 902 of the light-emitting element G2 manufactured as above.
- the emission spectrums in FIG 9 correspond to emission spectrums when current supplied to the light-emitting elements with a current density of 25 mA/cm 2 .
- the emission spectrum 902 of the light-emitting element G2 is located in a position shifted to the long-wavelength side of the emission spectrum 901 of the light-emitting element G1 in FIG. 9 .
- DNTPD having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm
- NPB having a thickness of 30nm is formed as a hole transport layer
- t-BuDNA having a thickness of 40 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer
- Alq having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as an electron transport layer
- calcium fluoride having a thickness of 2 nm is formed as an electron inject layer
- Al having a thickness of 50nm is formed as a cathode sequentially.
- DNTPD having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm
- NPB having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a hole transport layer
- a co-evaporation layer of 40nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating t-BuDNA and TPAQn
- Alq having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as an electron transport layer
- calcium fluoride having a thickness of 2 nm is formed as an electron inject layer
- Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially.
- the ratio of t-BuDNA to TPAQ in the light-emitting layer is controlled so TPAQn has a concentration of 5wt%.
- FIG. 10 shows an emission spectrum 1001 of the light-emitting element B1 manufactured as above and an emission spectrum 1002 of the light-emitting element B2 manufactured as above.
- the emission spectrums in FIG 10 correspond to emission spectrums when current is supplied to the light-emitting elements with a current density of 25 mA/cm 2 .
- the emission spectrum 1002 of the light-emitting element B2 is located in a position shifted to the long-wavelength side of the emission spectrum 1001 of the light-emitting element B1 in FIG. 10 .
- FIG. 11 shows the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram and a diagram where each color coordinate of the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2 manufactured as above are plotted.
- a region where color coordinates of the light-emitting elements R1, G1, and B1 are connected corresponds to RGB1
- a region where color coordinates of the light-emitting elements R2, G2, and B2 are connected corresponds to RGB2.
- any one of the color coordinates of the light-emitting elements R2, G2, and B2 is only required to be located outside the region where color coordinates of the light-emitting elements R1, G1, and B1 are connected. This is because if all of the light-emitting elements R2, G2, and B2 have color coordinates inside the region where color coordinates of the light-emitting elements R1, G1, and B1 are connected, color reproduction areas of RGB 1 and RGB2 overlap with each other.
- the display device of the invention can employ the aforementioned materials of the light-emitting elements in each pixel.
- the aforementioned materials of the light-emitting elements are only illustrative, and therefore, any light-emitting element can be employed as long as it has similar color coordinates to those of the invention.
- the picture element of the invention includes the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel.
- a light-emitting element is provided in each of the first pixel to the sixth pixel, so that a light-emitting element R1, a light-emitting element R2, a light-emitting element G1, a light-emitting element G2, a light-emitting element B1, and a light-emitting element B2 are connected to the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel, respectively.
- the light-emitting element R1 in the first pixel and the light-emitting element R2 in the second pixel of the invention in this specification have chromaticity whose x-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more.
- the light-emitting element G1 in the third pixel and the light-emitting element G2 in the fourth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more.
- the light-emitting element B1 in the fifth pixel and the light-emitting element B2 in the sixth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.15 or less and 0.20 or less, respectively.
- the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels are formed to have different emission spectrums from each other; the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels are formed to have different emission spectrums from each other, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels are formed to have different emission spectrums from each other, by varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting elements.
- the color coordinates on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels, respectively.
- a specific example is shown below.
- CuPc of having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm; NPB having a thickness of 40 nm is formed as a hole transport layer; a co-evaporation layer of 40 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating Alq which is a host material and Coumarin 6 which is a green light-emitting material; a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 30snm is formed as an electron inject layer, by co-evaporating Alq and Li; and Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially.
- the ratio of Alq to Coumarin 6 in the light-emitting layer is controlled so that Coumarin 6 has a concentration of 0.3wt%.
- the ratio of Alq to Li in the electron inject layer is controlled so that Li has a concentration of 1 wt%.
- FIG 12A A stacked structure of the light-emitting element G1 provided in the third pixel is shown in FIG 12A .
- the light-emitting element G1 has an element structure where a substrate 1211, an anode 1213 formed thereover with a transistor 1212 sandwiched therebetween, a hole inject layer 1201A which is made of a hole inject material, a hole transport layer 1202A which is made of a hole transport material, a light-emitting layer 1203A, an electron transport layer 1204A which is made of an electron transport material, an electron inject layer 1205A which is made of an electron inject material, and a cathode 1214 are stacked in this order.
- a stacked structure in a right view of FIG. 12A corresponds to an enlarged cross-sectional view of the light-emitting element portion in FIG. 12A .
- CuPc having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm; NPB having a thickness of 40 nm is formed as a hole transport layer, a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 40 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating Alq which is a host material and Coumarin 6 which is a green light-emitting material; a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as an electron inject layer, by co-evaporating Alq and Li; a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 180 nm is formed, by co-evaporating NPB and molybdenum oxide (VI); and Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially.
- NPB having a thickness of 40 nm is formed as a hole transport layer
- a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 40 nm is formed as a
- the ratio of Alq to Coumarin 6 in the light-emitting layer is controlled so that Coumarin 6 has a concentration of 0.3wt%.
- the ratio of Alq to Li in the electron inject layer is controlled so that Li has a concentration of 1wt%.
- the ratio of NPB to molybdenum oxide (VI) is controlled so that molybdenum oxide has a concentration of 20wt%.
- FIG 12B A stacked structure of the light-emitting element G2 provided in the fourth pixel is shown in FIG 12B .
- the light-emitting element G2 has an element structure where a substrate 1211, an anode 1213 formed thereover with a transistor 1212 sandwiched therebetween, a hole inject layer 1201B which is made of a hole inject material, a hole transport layer 1202B which is made of a hole transport material, a light-emitting layer 1203B, an electron transport layer 1204B which is made of an electron transport material, the electron inject layer 1205B which is made of an electron inject material, a co-evaporation layer of NPB and molybdenum oxide (VI) 1206, and a cathode 1214 are stacked in this order.
- a stacked structure in a right view of FIG. 12B corresponds to an enlarged cross-sectional view of the light-emitting element portion in FIG. 12B .
- FIG 13 shows an emission spectrum 1301 of the light-emitting element G1 which is stacked as shown in FIG 12A , and an emission spectrum 1302 of the light-emitting element G2 which is stacked as shown in FIG. 12B .
- the emission spectrums in FIG 13 correspond to emission spectrums when current is supplied to the light-emitting elements with a current density of 25 mA/cm 2 .
- the emission spectrum 1302 of the light-emitting element G2 is located in a position shifted to the short-wavelength side of the emission spectrum 1301 of the light-emitting element G1 in FIG. 13 .
- the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels can be formed to have different emission spectrums from each other; and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels can be formed to have different emission spectrums from each other, by varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting elements.
- the color coordinates on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram can be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels.
- the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels can be formed to have different color coordinates from each other on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram as well as the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels can be formed to have different color coordinates from each other on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram, by varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting element.
- the thickness of the respective light-emitting element by using different materials for the respective light-emitting elements while at the same time varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting elements, light-emitting elements having different color coordinates from each other on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram may be obtained.
- varying the emission spectrums by varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting elements is not limited to be achieved by forming a co-evaporation layer.
- varying the emission spectrums by varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting elements may be achieved by thickening any of a hole inject layer 1201, a hole transport layer 1202, a light-emitting layer 1203, an electron transport layer 1204, or an electron inject layer 1205.
- the thickness as a whole may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2.
- the thickness as a whole may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2.
- the thickness as a whole may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2.
- the thickness as a whole may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2.
- the thickness as a whole may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2.
- the thickness as a whole may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2.
- the thickness may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2.
- a co-evaporation layer including metal oxide is employed in this embodiment mode.
- metal oxide for the co-evaporation layer, increase in driving voltage due to thickening of the film can be prevented, and thus, it is preferable.
- the optical distance is calculated by the following formula: "the actual distance x the refractive index at wavelength ⁇ ".
- the optical distance of the light-emitting element of this embodiment mode in the invention may be designed in any manner as long as the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 have different emission spectrums from each other, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 have different emission spectrums from each other, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 have different emission spectrums from each other.
- the light-emitting elements may be designed to be thinner in ascending order from the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G1, the light-emitting element G2, the light-emitting element B1, and the light-emitting element B2.
- the light-emitting elements may also be designed to be thinner in ascending order from the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2.
- the distance D between a first electrode (an anode) and a second electrode (a cathode) of the light-emitting element varies between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2, respectively in this embodiment mode.
- the distance D between the first electrode (the anode) and the second electrode (the cathode) of the light-emitting element corresponds to the distance between an end face of the first electrode on the light-emitting layer side and an end face of the second electrode on the light-emitting layer side (a boundary of the first electrode on the hole inject layer, and a boundary of the second electrode on the electron inject layer in this embodiment mode).
- the display device of the invention can employ the aforementioned materials of the light-emitting elements in each pixel.
- the aforementioned materials of the light-emitting elements are only illustrative; therefore, any light-emitting element can be employed as long as it has a similar color coordinate to that of the invention.
- the picture element of the invention includes the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel in FIG. 2
- a light-emitting element is provided in each of the first pixel to the sixth pixel, such that a light-emitting element R1, a light-emitting element R2, a light-emitting element G1, a light-emitting element G2, a light-emitting element B1, and a light-emitting element B2 are connected to the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel, respectively.
- the light-emitting element R1 of the first pixel and the light-emitting element R2 of the second pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose x-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more.
- the light-emitting element G1 of the third pixel and the light-emitting element G2 of the fourth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more.
- the light-emitting element B1 of the fifth pixel and the light-emitting element B2 of the sixth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.15 or less and 0.20 or less, respectively.
- the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels are formed to have roughly equal emission spectrums to each other
- the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels are formed to have roughly equal emission spectrums to each other
- the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels are formed to have roughly equal emission spectrums to each other.
- the color coordinates on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels.
- a specific example is shown below.
- a configuration of a display device is described using a cross-sectional structure of a picture element portion.
- FIGS. 14A and 14B are partial cross-sectional views of a picture element of the display device in this embodiment mode.
- the display device of the invention shown in FIG. 14A includes a substrate 1400, a base insulating film 1401, a semiconductor layer 1402, a gate insulating film 1403, a gate electrode 1404, an interlayer insulating film 1405, a connecting portion 1406, a first electrode 1407 of a light-emitting element, a partition wall 1408, a light-emitting layer 1409, a second electrode 1410 of the light-emitting element, a color filter (R1) 1411, a color filter (R2) 1412, a color filter (G1) 1413, a color filter (G2) 1414, a color filter (B1) 1415, a color filter (B2) 1416, and an opposite substrate 1417.
- R1 color filter
- R2 color filter
- G1 color filter
- G2 color filter
- B1 color filter
- the light emitting-element is formed at a portion where the light-emitting layer 1409 is sandwiched between the first electrode 1407 and the second electrode 1410 of the light-emitting element.
- the light-emitting element is connected to a thin film transistor which is made of the semiconductor layer 1402, the gate insulating film 1403, and the gate electrode 1404 through the connecting portion 1406 which is electrically in contact with the first electrode 1407 of the light-emitting element to be controlled light emission.
- this embodiment mode shows a structure where the first electrode 1407 is a reflecting electrode formed of a highly reflective material, and the second electrode 1410 is a transparent electrode formed of a conductive material having a light transmitting property, so that light is extracted from the direction of the second electrode 1410.
- the thin film transistors in FIG 14A drive the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G1, the light-emitting element G2, the light-emitting element B1, and the light-emitting element B2, respectively, in order from left to right.
- emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements in the case where the color filter are not provided in the respective pixels are roughly equal between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2.
- FIG. 14A schematically show the light emitted through the color filters from the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element G1, the light-emitting element B1, the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G2, and the light-emitting element B2, respectively, in order from left to right.
- the color filter (R1) 1411, the color filter (R2) 1412, the color filter (G1) 1413, the color filter (G2) 1414, the color filter (B1) 1415, and the color filter (B2) 1416 are provided at light-emission sides of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels, respectively.
- the color filters may be manufactured by any of a pigment dispersion method, a printing method, an electrodeposition method, and a staining method.
- the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels may be light-emitting elements having the same emission spectrum, for example, a light-emitting element having an emission spectrum which emits white light.
- FIG. 14B is a partial cross-sectional view of a picture element of the display device in this embodiment mode. Note that each structure of the display device in the invention shown in FIG. 14B conforms to FIG 14A .
- emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G2, and the light-emitting element B2 are varied by the transmission properties of the color filter (R2) 1412, the color filter (G2) 1414, and the color filter (B2) 1416. Accordingly, by varying the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 from each other, varying emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 from each other, and varying emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 from each other, light-emitting elements each having a different color coordinate on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram can be obtained.
- light-emitting elements each having a different color coordinate on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram may be obtained.
- white light-emitting elements are disposed as the same color light-emitting elements, and color filters may be disposed above the first pixel to the sixth pixel as shown in FIG. 14A .
- FIG. 15A is a view showing a display device of the invention having a different structure from FIG. 14A .
- each structure of the display device in the invention shown in FIG. 15A conforms to FIG 14A .
- FIG 15A an example of a bottom emission display device having a structure where the light-emitting element emits light to the first electrode 1407 side thereof is shown.
- the first electrode 1407 is formed of a conductive material having a light transmitting property in order to extract light emission from the first electrode 1407 side
- the second electrode 1410 is formed as a reflecting electrode which is manufactured by using a highly reflective conductive material.
- the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels, the color filter (R1) 1411, the color filter (R2) 1412, the color filter (G1) 1413, the color filter (G2) 1414, the color filter (B1) 1415, and the color filter (B2) 1416 are provided, respectively at light-emission sides of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels.
- the color filters may be manufactured by any of a pigment dispersion method, a printing method, an electrodeposition method, and a staining method.
- Each of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels may be a light-emitting element including a light-emitting element having the same emission spectrum, for example, a light-emitting element having an emission spectrum which emits white light.
- a process of producing the light-emitting element can be simplified, and thus, it is preferable.
- FIG 15B is a partial cross-sectional view of a picture element of the display device in this embodiment mode. Note that each structure of the display device in the invention shown in FIG. 15B conforms to FIG 15A .
- emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G2, and the light-emitting element B2 are varied by the transmission properties of the color filter (R2) 1412, the color filter (G2) 1414, and the color filter (B2) 1416.
- light-emitting elements each having a different color coordinate on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram may be obtained.
- white light-emitting elements are disposed as the same color light-emitting elements, and color filters may be disposed above the first pixel to the sixth pixel as shown in FIG. 15A .
- FIG. 15C is a partial cross-sectional view of a picture element of the display device in this embodiment mode. Note that each structure of the display device in the invention shown in FIG 15C conforms to FIGS. 15A and 15B .
- the color filter (R1) 1411, the color filter (R2) 1412, the color filter (G1) 1413, the color filter (G2) 1414, the color filter (B1) 1415, and the color filter (B2) 1416 are disposed below the first electrode 1407 which is disposed between the light-emitting element and a transistor.
- the process can be simplified, and thus, it is easy to conduct.
- 40A includes a substrate 4000, a base insulating film 4001, a semiconductor layer 4002, a gate insulating film 4003, a gate electrode 4004, an interlayer insulating film 4005, a connecting portion 4006, a first electrode 4007 of a light-emitting element, a partition wall 4008, light-emitting layers 4009A and 4009B, a second electrode 4010 of the light-emitting element, a color conversion layer (R1) 4011, a color conversion layer (G1) 4012, a color conversion layer (R2) 4013, a color conversion layer (G2) 4014, and an opposite substrate 4015.
- blue light-emitting elements B1 and B2 each having a different emission spectrum are disposed as the light-emitting layers 4009A and 4009B which emit short-wavelength monochromatic light, and in the case of a top emission structure as shown in FIG. 40A , the color conversion layers may be disposed above the first pixel, the second pixel, the fourth pixel, and the fifth pixel.
- blue light-emitting elements B1 and B2 each having a different emission spectrum are disposed as the light-emitting layers 4009A and 4009B which emit short-wavelength monochromatic light, and the color conversion layers may be disposed below the first pixel, the second pixel, the fourth pixel, and the fifth pixel as shown in FIG 40B .
- the thickness of the blue light-emitting elements B1 and B2 is varied like light-emitting layers 4109A and 4109B shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B to vary emission spectrums.
- the blue light-emitting layers 4109A and 4109B each having a different emission spectrum are disposed as the light-emitting elements which emit short-wavelength monochromatic light, and color conversion layers may be disposed above the first pixel, the second pixel, the fourth pixel, and the fifth pixel.
- the light-emitting layers 4109A and 4109B of the blue light-emitting elements are disposed as shown in FIG 41B , and the color conversion layers may be disposed below the first pixel, the second pixel, the fourth pixel, and the fifth pixel. Note that each structure of the display device in the invention shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B conforms to FIGS. 40A and 40B .
- the color conversion method for converting a color of light emitted from a light-emitting element into a required color through a color conversion layer is advantageous in that there is no need for separately coloring the light-emitting layers since a luminous color emitted from the light-emitting element is a monochromatic color.
- the color conversion method is preferable since it obtains desired light emission with the color conversion layers using a process of absorption of light, excitation, and light emission.
- the picture element of the invention includes the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel in FIG. 2 .
- a light-emitting element is provided in each of the first pixel to the sixth pixel such that a light-emitting element R1, a light-emitting element R2, a light-emitting element G1, a light-emitting element G2, a light-emitting element B1, and a light-emitting element B2 are connected to the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel, respectively.
- a first pixel 1601, a second pixel 1602, a third pixel 1603, a fourth pixel 1604, a fifth pixel 1605, and a sixth pixel 1606 which are included in a picture element 1600 as shown in FIG. 16 are arranged in stripes.
- each of the first pixel 1601 to the sixth pixel 1606 is disposed in a column direction in FIG. 16 ; however, a method for disposing each pixel is not limited to this.
- each pixel may be disposed in a row direction, or the first pixel 1601 having the light-emitting element R1 and the fifth pixel 1605 having the light-emitting element G2 may be disposed to be adjacent to each other.
- the shape of each pixel is not limited to a rectangle as shown in FIG. 16 , and for example, a square, other polygons, or a shape having a curvature may be employed.
- first pixel 1601 to the sixth pixel 1606 may be disposed either at even intervals or not.
- the first pixel 1601, the second pixel 1602, and the third pixel 1603 are arranged in the first row while the fourth pixel 1604, the fifth pixel 1605, and the sixth pixel 1606 are arranged in the next row, and the row of the first pixel 1601, the second pixel 1602, and the third pixel 1603, and the row of the fourth pixel 1604, the fifth pixel 1605, and the sixth pixel 1606 may be shifted by one pixel.
- the row of the first pixel 1601, the second pixel 1602, and the third pixel 1603, and the row of the fourth pixel 1604, the fifth pixel 1605, and the sixth pixel 1606 are shifted by one pixel in the row direction; however, the number of pixels is not particularly limited to one.
- the row of the first pixel 1601, the second pixel 1602, and the third pixel 1603, and the row of the fourth pixel 1604, the fifth pixel 1605, and the sixth pixel 1606 may be shifted by half a pixel as shown in FIG. 53B .
- the luminous efficiency varies depending on a light-emitting element which presents each luminous color.
- relatively larger current is required to be supplied to a light-emitting element having low luminous efficiency.
- human eyes have different sensitivity to each emission wavelength, and in general, human eyes have higher sensitivity to a green wavelength than a red wavelength or a blue wavelength.
- luminance of the blue light-emitting element or the red light-emitting element needs to be set relatively higher than the luminance of the green light-emitting element.
- luminance of the blue light-emitting element or the red light-emitting element needs to be set relatively higher than the luminance of the green light-emitting element.
- deterioration of the light-emitting element is promoted and power consumption of the display device is increased.
- the color reproducibility of the display device may be decreased, which in turn decreases the image quality.
- a structure where area dimensions of the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G1, the light-emitting element G2, the light-emitting element B1, and the light-emitting element B2 are varied in advance may be employed.
- a structure where area dimensions of the light-emitting elements R1, R2, B1, and B2 are doubled while area dimensions of the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 are kept unchanged may be employed.
- pixels of the display device in this embodiment mode shown in FIG. 17 which include a first pixel 1701, a second pixel 1702, a third pixel 1703, a fourth pixel 1704, a fifth pixel 1705, and a sixth pixel 1706 in a picture element 1700 are arranged such that the first pixel 1701, the second pixel 1702, and the third pixel 1703 are arranged in delta pattern, and the fourth pixel 1704, the fifth pixel 1705, and the sixth pixel 1706 are also arranged in delta pattern.
- a structure where area dimensions of the first pixel 1701, the fourth pixel 1704, and the second pixel 1702 are varied from each other as well as area dimensions of the fifth pixel 1705, the third pixel 1703, and the sixth pixel 1706 are varied from each other is employed in FIG. 17 ; however, the invention is not limited to this.
- the area dimensions of the first pixel 1701, the fourth pixel 1704, and the second pixel 1702 may be the same as well as the area dimensions of the fifth pixel 1705, the third pixel 1703, and the sixth pixel 1706 may be the same, or a structure where all of the first light-emitting element 1701 to the sixth pixel 1706 have different area dimensions from each other may be employed.
- a structure of a picture element is not particularly limited, and a structure where an image is formed by a picture element 1710 may be employed.
- the first pixel 1701 having the light-emitting element R1 and the third pixel 1703 having the light-emitting element B1 may be disposed to be adjacent to each other.
- the shape of each pixel is not limited to a rectangle as shown in FIG 17 , and for example, a square, other polygons, or a shape having a curvature may be employed. Note that the first pixel 1701 to the sixth pixel 1706 may be disposed either at even intervals or not.
- pixels are not limited to the first pixel to the sixth pixel.
- a structure where a first pixel 1801, a second pixel 1802, a third pixel 1803, a fourth pixel 1804, a fifth pixel 1805, a sixth pixel 1806, a seventh pixel 1807, an eighth pixel 1808, and a ninth pixel 1809 are provided may be employed as shown in FIG. 18 .
- FIG 18 a structure where area dimensions of the first pixel 1801, the fourth pixel 1804, and the seventh pixel 1807 are varied from each other, area dimensions of the second pixel 1802, the fifth light-emitting element 1805, and the eighth pixel 1808 are varied from each other, and area dimensions of the third pixel 1803, the sixth pixel 1806, and the ninth pixel 1809 are varied from each other is employed; however, the invention is not limited to this.
- the area dimensions of the first pixel 1801, the fourth pixel 1804, and the seventh pixel 1807 may be the same, the area dimensions of the second pixel 1802, the fifth pixel 1805, and the eighth pixel 1808 may be the same, and the area dimensions of the third pixel 1803, the sixth pixel 1806, and the ninth pixel 1809 may be the same, or a structure where all of the first pixel 1801 to the ninth pixel 1809 have different area dimensions from each other may be employed.
- pixels are not limited to the first pixel to the sixth pixel.
- a structure where a first pixel 1901, a second pixel 1902, and a third pixel 1903, a fourth pixel 1904, a fifth pixel 1905, a sixth pixel 1906, and a seventh pixel 1907 are arranged may be employed as shown in FIG. 19A .
- the seventh pixel 1907 has a structure where a white light-emitting element W is provided.
- the light-emitting element W of the seventh pixel 1907 has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are in the range of 0.30 to 0.40 and in the range of 0.30 to 0.40, respectively. More preferably, the light-emitting element W of the seventh pixel 1907 has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are in the range of 0.30 to 0.35 and in the range of 0.30 to 0.35, respectively.
- a structure where the area dimensions of the first pixel 1901 and the fourth pixel 1904 are the same, the area dimensions of the second pixel 1902 and the fifth pixel 1905 are the same, and the area dimensions of the third pixel 1903 and the sixth pixel 1906 are the same is employed in FIG. 19A ; however, the invention is not limited to this.
- a structure where area dimensions of the first pixel 1901 and the fourth pixel 1904 vary from each other, area dimensions of the second pixel 1902 and the fifth pixel 1905 vary from each other, and area dimensions of the third pixel 1903 and the sixth pixel 1906 vary from each other may be employed, or a structure where all of the pixel 1901 to the sixth pixel 1906 have different area dimensions from each other may be employed.
- FIG. 19B A structure which is different from FIG. 19A is shown in FIG. 19B .
- What is different from FIG. 19A is the disposition of the first pixel 1901, the second pixel 1902, and the third pixel 1903, the fourth pixel 1904, the fifth pixel 1905, the sixth pixel 1906, and the seventh pixel 1907.
- disposition of each pixel is not particularly limited to this.
- the shape of each pixel is not limited to a rectangle as shown in FIG. 19A , and for example, a square, other polygons, or a shape having a curvature may be employed.
- the light-emitting element W which emits white light in the seventh pixel power consumption can be reduced since a white color can be displayed by using light emission of only the light-emitting element W compared to the case of displaying a white color by using a color mixture of the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2, and thus, it is preferable.
- a neutral color is displayed by an additive color mixture using a white color, more reduction in power consumption can be expected, and thus, it is preferable.
- a structure of a picture element where a light-emitting element W1 which emits white light is provided in the seventh pixel, and a light-emitting element W2 which emits white light is provided in the eighth pixel may also be employed.
- a structure of a picture element where a light-emitting element W1 which emits white light is provided in the seventh pixel, and a light-emitting element W2 which emits white light is provided in the eighth pixel may also be employed.
- the aforementioned light-emitting elements R1 and R2 light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and light-emitting elements B1 and B2
- emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements W1 and W2 are varied from each other. Accordingly, a display device which displays more bright colors and has reduced power consumption can be provided.
- the light-emitting element W1 of the seventh pixel and the light-emitting element W2 of the eighth pixel have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are in the range of 0.30 to 0.40 and in the range of 0.30 to 0.40, respectively. More preferably, the light-emitting element W1 of the seventh pixel and the light-emitting element W2 of the eighth pixel have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are in the range of 0.30 to 0.35 and in the range of 0.30 to 0.35, respectively.
- the length of sustain (light-emitting) periods can be freely set since address (writing) periods and the sustain (light-emitting)periods are completely separated; however, in the address (writing) periods, neither writing nor light emission is conducted in any other rows while writing is conducted in a certain row. That is, the duty ratio as a whole is decreased.
- FIG. 20 A pixel configuration for achieving the aforementioned operation is shown in FIG. 20 .
- the pixel configuration shown in FIG 20 includes a first transistor 2001 for switching to control input of a video signal (also called a switching transistor), a second transistor 2002 for driving to decide the state of lighting or non-lighting of a light-emitting element by the video signal (also called a driving transistor), a third transistor 2003 for erasing a gate-source voltage of the second transistor 2002 (also called an erasing transistor), a light-emitting element 2004, a storage capacitor 2005, a signal line 2006, a first scan line 2007, a second scan line 2008, a power supply line 2009, and an opposite electrode 2010.
- the storage capacitor 2005 is provided so as to hold a gate-source voltage (gate voltage) of the first transistor 2001 and the second transistor 2002 more accurately; however, it is not necessarily required. Note that voltage means a potential difference from a ground unless otherwise specified.
- the light-emitting element 2004 corresponds to the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2 in FIG. 2 .
- the first transistor 2001 is controlled by using the first scan line 2007.
- a video signal is input from the signal line 2006 to the storage capacitor 2005.
- the second transistor 2002 is turned on/off, and a current flows from the power supply line 2009 to the opposite electrode 2010 through the light-emitting element 2004.
- the second scan line 2008 is selected to turn on the third transistor 2003, and turn off the second transistor 2002. Then, a current does not flow from the power supply line 2009 to the opposite electrode 2010 through the light-emitting element 2004. Accordingly, a non-lighting period can be made so that the length of a lighting period can be freely controlled.
- FIG. 21 a timing chart in the case of conducting an operation of erasing a signal of a pixel is shown in FIG. 21 .
- a case where a 3-bit digital video signal is used in a digital time gray scale method similarly to FIG. 5 is described as an example.
- the digital time gray scale method one frame period 2101 is further divided into a plurality of sub frame periods.
- the video signal has 3 bits, the one frame period 2101 is divided into three sub frame periods, and writing and displaying of each luminous color are conducted in each sub frame period.
- each sub frame period includes an address (writing) period Ta# (# is a natural number) and a sustain (light-emitting) period Ts#.
- the address (writing) period and the sustain (light-emitting) period are not separated. That is, upon completion of writing in an i-th row, light emission is started immediately in the i-th row. After that, while writing is conducted in an (i + 1)-th row, the i-th row is already in the sustain (light-emitting) period. By employing such timing, the duty ratio can be increased.
- a second scan line driver circuit for controlling the third transistor, selective pulses for erasing are sequentially output from a first row to turn on the third transistor at desired timing.
- the second scan line driver circuit may have the same configuration as a first scan line driver circuit which conducts normal writing. Accordingly, a period of writing signals for erasing (hereinafter, it is described as a reset period) Te3 has an equal length to the address (writing) period.
- gray scales can be expressed even when the length ratio of the sustain (light-emitting) periods is not necessarily the power of two.
- FIG. 22A one frame period denoted by 2201 in the pixel configuration of FIG. 4 is divided into six periods denoted by 2202 to 2207, and writing and displaying of each luminous color are conducted in each period.
- FIG. 22B one frame period denoted by 2201 in the pixel configuration of FIG 20 is divided into six periods shown with 2202 to 2207, and writing and displaying of each luminous color are conducted in each period.
- the one frame period 2201 is further divided into a plurality of sub frame periods.
- the video signal has 3 bits, the one frame period 2201 is divided into three sub frame periods.
- FIGS. 22A and 22B one of the six periods denoted by the first period 2202, the second period 2203, the third period 2204, the fourth period 2205, the fifth period 2206, and the sixth period 2207 which correspond to the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2, for example, the first period 2202 is described.
- each sub frame period includes an address (writing) period Ta1 # (# is a natural number) and a sustain (light-emitting) period Ts1 # .
- each sub frame period includes an address (writing) period Ta2 # (# is a natural number) and a sustain (light-emitting) period Ts2 # .
- the third period 2204 to the sixth period 2207 are described in the same manner.
- the third transistor 2003 is used in FIG. 20
- another method can be employed as long as a current can be controlled not to be supplied to the light-emitting 2004 by forcibly making a non-lighting period.
- the non-lighting period may be made by disposing a switch in somewhere on a path where a current flows from the power supply line 2009 to the opposite electrode 2010 through the light-emitting element 2004, and by controlling on/off of the switch.
- the gate-source voltage of the second transistor 2002 may be controlled to forcibly turn off the second transistor 2002.
- FIG. 23 An example of a pixel configuration in the case of forcibly turning off the second transistor 2002 is shown in FIG. 23 . What is different from FIG. 20 is that an erasing diode 2301 is connected between a gate of a second transistor 2002 and a second scan line 2008.
- the second scan line 2008 (here, it is set to be at a high potential) is selected to turn on the erasing diode 2301, thereby a current flows from the second scan line 2008 to the gate of the second transistor 2002. Accordingly, the second transistor 2002 is turned off. Then, a current does not flow from the power supply line 2009 to the opposite electrode 2010 through the light-emitting element 2004. Accordingly, a non-lighting period can be made so that the length of a lighting period can be freely controlled.
- the second scan line 2008 (here, it is set to be at a low potential) is not selected. Then, the erasing diode 2301 is turned off so that the gate potential of the second transistor 2002 is held.
- the erasing diode 2301 may be any element as long as it has a rectifying property.
- Such an element may be a PN junction diode, a PIN diode, a Schottky diode, or a zener diode.
- the erasing diode 2301 may be a diode-connected transistor (a transistor whose gate and drain are connected). A circuit diagram at this case is shown in FIG. 24 .
- a diode-connected transistor 2401 is employed as the erasing diode 2301.
- an n-channel transistor is employed; however, the invention is not limited to this.
- a p-channel transistor may also be employed.
- timing charts, pixel configurations, and driving methods shown in this embodiment mode are only exemplary, and the invention is not limited to these. Various types of timing charts, pixel configurations, and driving methods can be applied.
- FIG. 25 is a characteristic diagram of an operation of the transistor where a horizontal axis shows a gate-source voltage of the transistor while a vertical axis shows a source-drain current of the transistor.
- the display device is hardly influenced by ghosting.
- a current characteristic of the driving transistor varies, a current which flows thereto also varies. Therefore, there is a case where display unevenness is generated.
- the driving transistor When the driving transistor operates in the saturation region in this manner, the value of a current does not change even if the characteristics of the light-emitting element change. Accordingly, in this case, the driving transistor can be regarded as operating as a current source. Therefore, this driving is called a constant current driving.
- the driving transistor when the driving transistor operates in the linear region, the value of the current does not change even if the current characteristic of the driving transistor varies. Accordingly, in this case, the driving transistor can be regarded as operating as a switch. Thus, it is regarded that a voltage of the power supply line is directly applied to the light-emitting element. Therefore, this driving is called a constant voltage driving.
- the invention can employ either the constant current driving or the constant voltage driving. Accordingly, whether to employ the constant current driving or the constant voltage driving may be changed appropriately in view of variations of the light-emitting element and the transistor.
- FIG 26 shows a layout diagram of the circuit diagram shown in FIG 4 . Note that the circuit diagram and the layout diagram are not limited to FIG 4 and FIG 26 , respectively.
- Switching transistors 2601A and 2601B, driving transistors 2602A and 2602B, and electrodes of light-emitting elements R1 and R2 are disposed.
- Sources of the switching transistors 2641A and 2601B are connected to a signal line 2604, while drains thereof are connected to gates of the driving transistors 2602A and 2602B, respectively.
- a gate of the switching transistor 2601A is connected to a scan line 2605A, while a gate of the switching transistor 2601B is connected to a scan line 2605B.
- Sources of the driving transistors 2602A and 2602B are connected to a power supply line 2606, while drains thereof are connected to the electrodes of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, respectively.
- a storage capacitor (not shown) is connected between the gate of either the driving transistor 2602A or 2602B and the power supply line 2606, it is not necessarily required.
- the number of the signal lines 2604 may be more than one corresponding to the driving transistors 2602A and 2602B.
- the signal line 2604 and the power supply line 2606 are formed of a second wire, while the scan lines 2605A and 2605B are formed of a first wire.
- FIG 27 shows a top view of a pixel configuration corresponding to FIG. 26 .
- Reference numerals denoting the respective portions in FIG. 27 correspond to those in FIG. 26 .
- FIG. 27 in the case of a top-gate structure, films of a substrate, a semiconductor layer, a gate insulating film, a first wire, an interlayer insulating film, and a second wire are formed in this order.
- films of a substrate, a first wire, a gate insulating film, a semiconductor layer, an interlayer insulating film, and a second wire are formed in this order.
- storage capacitors 2701A and 2701B are provided between the power supply line and the first wires.
- each of the switching transistors 2601 A and 2601 B is formed to have two channel formation regions
- a single-gate structure where one channel formation region is formed or a triple-gate structure where three channel formation regions are formed may be used as well.
- a dual-gate structure where two gate electrodes are disposed above and below a channel formation region with gate insulating films sandwiched therebetween, or other structures may be used.
- light-emitting elements G1 and G2 and light-emitting elements B1 and B2 preferably have a similar structure to the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in order to make a color mixture more visible.
- the scan line 2605B can be replaced by a scan line 2605A of a pixel in another row. That is, the scan line 2605B of the display device shown in FIG. 26 can be omitted.
- FIG 28 shows an exemplary configuration in the case where the scan line 2605B in the pixel of FIG 26 is omitted and replaced by the scan line 2605A of a pixel in another row.
- the power supply line is not necessarily required to be disposed in parallel with the signal line, and may be provided in parallel with the scan line, or each power supply line may be provided in grid patterns. That is, the power supply line in the pixel in FIG. 26 may be provided in parallel with the scan line as shown in FIG 29 .
- wires provided around a pixel of the display device of the invention can have various structures, and thus the invention is not limited to the structures described in this specification.
- FIG. 30A is a top view showing a display panel
- FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view taken along a line A-A' of FIG. 30A
- the display panel includes a signal line driver circuit 3001, a pixel portion 3002, a first scan line driver circuit 3003, and a second scan line driver circuit 3006, which are shown by dotted lines.
- the display panel also includes a sealing substrate 3004 and a sealant 3005, and the inner side of the sealant 3005 is a space 3007.
- a wire 3008 is a wire for transmitting signals to be input into the first scan line driver circuit 3003, the second scan line driver circuit 3006, and the signal line driver circuit 3001, and receives video signals, clock signals, start signals, and the like from an FPC 3009 (Flexible Printed Circuit) which serves as an external input terminal.
- An IC chip 3019 (a semiconductor chip incorporating a memory circuit, a buffer circuit, and the like) is mounted on a connecting portion between the FPC 3009 and the display panel by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like.
- COG Chip On Glass
- a display device in this specification includes not only a main body of a display panel, but includes a display panel in the condition that an FPC or a PWB is attached. Further, it also includes a display panel on which an IC chip and the like are mounted.
- the pixel portion 3002 and its peripheral driver circuits (the first scan line driver circuit 3003, the second scan line driver circuit 3006, and the signal line driver circuit 3001) are actually formed over the substrate 3010, only the signal line driver circuit 3001 and the pixel portion 3002 are shown herein.
- the signal line driver circuit 3001 is constructed from transistors of single conductivity type, such as an n-channel TFT 3020 and an n-channel TFT 3021. Note that in the case of constructing pixels by using transistors of single conductivity type, given that a peripheral driver circuit is constructed by using only n-channel transistors, a single conductivity type display panel can be manufactured. Needless to say, not only transistors of single conductivity type, but a CMOS circuit constructed from an n-channel transistor and a p-channel transistor may be used.
- this embodiment mode shows a display panel where a pixel portion and peripheral driver circuits are formed over the same substrate
- the invention is not necessarily limited to this and a part or all of the peripheral driver circuits may be formed in an IC chip so that it is mounted on the display panel by COG or the like.
- the driver circuit is not required to be formed from transistors of single conductivity type, and thus it may be formed by combining an n-channel transistor and a p-channel transistor.
- the pixel portion 3002 includes a TFT 3011 and a TFT 3012. Note that a source electrode of the TFT 3012 is connected to a first electrode 3013 (pixel electrode). In addition, an insulator 3014 is formed covering the edge of the first electrode 3013. Here, the insulator 3014 is formed by using a positive photosensitive acrylic resin film.
- a top edge or a bottom edge of the insulator 3014 is formed to have a curved surface with a curvature.
- a curvature radius 0.2 to 3 ⁇ m.
- the insulator 3014 can be formed by using a negative photoresist which becomes insoluble in etchant by light or a positive photoresist which becomes soluble in etchant by light.
- a light-emitting layer 3016 and a second electrode 3017 (opposite electrode) are formed over the first electrode 3013.
- a material used for the first electrode 3013 functioning as an anode a material with a high work function is desirably used.
- the first electrode 3103 can be formed with a single film such as an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) film, an indium zinc oxide (IZO) film, a titanium nitride film, a chromium film, a tungsten film, a Zn film, or a Pt film, stacked layers of a titanium nitride film and a film containing aluminum as its main component, or a three-layer structure of a titanium nitride film, a film containing aluminum as its main component, and a titanium nitride film, or the like.
- ITO Indium Tin Oxide
- IZO indium zinc oxide
- the light-emitting layer 3016 is formed by a vapor deposition method using a vapor-deposition mask or an ink-jet method.
- a part of the light-emitting layer 3016 is formed by using a metal complex of the Group 4 in the periodic table, which may be combined with either a low molecular material or a high molecular material.
- the material used for the light-emitting layer is often an organic compound with a single layer or stacked layers; however, a structure where a film made of an organic compound partially contains an inorganic compound may be used as well. Further, known triplet materials can be used.
- a material with a low work function e.g., Al, Ag, Li, or Ca; or alloys of these such as MgAg, MgIn, AlLi, CaF 2 , or calcium nitride
- a material with a low work function e.g., Al, Ag, Li, or Ca; or alloys of these such as MgAg, MgIn, AlLi, CaF 2 , or calcium nitride
- the second electrode 3017 (cathode) is preferably formed of stacked layers of a thin metal film and a light-transmissive conductive film (e.g., ITO (an alloy of indium oxide and tin oxide), an alloy of indium oxide and zinc oxide (In 2 O 3 -ZnO), zinc oxide (ZnO), or the like).
- ITO an alloy of indium oxide and tin oxide
- In 2 O 3 -ZnO an alloy of indium oxide and zinc oxide
- ZnO zinc oxide
- the sealing substrate 3004 by attaching the sealing substrate 3004 to the substrate 3010 with the sealant 3005, a structure where a light-emitting element 3018 is provided in the space 3007 surrounded by the substrate 3010, the sealing substrate 3004, and the sealant 3005 is formed.
- the space 3007 may be filled with an inert gas (e.g., nitrogen, argon, or the like) or filled with the sealant 3005.
- the sealant 3005 is preferably formed with an epoxy resin.
- a material desirably transmits as little moisture and oxygen as possible.
- a plastic substrate made of FRP (Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastics), PVF (PolyVinyl Fluoride), mylar, polyester, acrylic, or the like can be used in addition to a glass substrate or a quartz substrate.
- the signal line driver circuit 3001, the pixel portion 3002, the first scan line driver circuit 3003, and the second scan line driver circuit 3006 By forming the signal line driver circuit 3001, the pixel portion 3002, the first scan line driver circuit 3003, and the second scan line driver circuit 3006 over the same substrate as shown in FIG 30 , cost reduction of the display device can be achieved.
- the signal line driver circuit 3001, the pixel portion 3002, the first scan line driver circuit 3003, and the second scan line driver circuit 3006 are formed by using transistors of single conductivity type, the manufacturing process can be simplified, which leads to a further cost reduction.
- a structure of a display panel is not limited to the structure where the signal line driver circuit 3001, the pixel portion 3002, the first scan line driver circuit 3003, and the second scan line driver circuit 3006 are formed over the same substrate as shown in FIG. 30A , and a structure where a signal line driver circuit 3101 shown in FIG 31 which corresponds to the signal line driver circuit 3001 is formed in an IC chip so that it is mounted on the display panel by COG or the like may be used.
- 31A correspond to the substrate 3010, the pixel portion 3002, the first scan line driver circuit 3003, the second scan line driver circuit 3006, the FPC 3009, the IC chip 3019, the sealing substrate 3004, and the sealant 3005 in FIG. 30A , respectively.
- first scan line driver circuit 3103 and the second scan line driver circuit 3104 By forming the first scan line driver circuit 3103 and the second scan line driver circuit 3104 over the same substrate as the pixel portion 3102, cost reduction can be achieved. Further, by forming the first scan line driver circuit 3103, the second scan line driver circuit 3104, and the pixel portion 3102 using transistors of single conductivity type, further cost reduction can be achieved. As a configuration of pixels included in the pixel portion 3102, the pixels shown in Embodiment Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 can be used.
- the IC chips may be mounted on the display panel by COG or the like.
- power consumption of a high-definition display device can be further reduced. Therefore, in order to obtain a display device with lower power consumption, polysilicon is desirably used for semiconductor layers of the transistors which are used in the pixel portion.
- a substrate 3110, a pixel portion 3112, an FPC 3115, an IC chip 3116, an IC chip 3117, a sealing substrate 3118, and a sealant 3119 in FIG. 31B correspond to the substrate 3010, the pixel portion 3002, the FPC 3009, the IC chip 3019, the sealing substrate 3004, and the sealant 3005 in FIG. 30A , respectively.
- amorphous silicon for semiconductor layers of the transistors in the pixel portion 3112, further cost reduction can be achieved. Further, a large display panel can be manufactured.
- a peripheral driver circuit 3201 formed in an IC chip may incorporate the functions of the first scan line driver circuit 3114, the second scan line driver circuit 3113, and the signal line driver circuit 3111 shown in FIG 31B .
- a substrate 3200, a pixel portion 3202, an FPC 3204, an IC chip 3205, an IC chip 3206, a sealing substrate 3207, and a sealant 3208 in FIG. 32A correspond to the substrate 3010, the pixel portion 3002, the FPC 3009, the IC chip 3019, the sealing substrate 3004, and the sealant 3005 in FIG 30A , respectively.
- FIG. 32B shows a schematic view for illustrating a connection of wires in the display device of FIG 32A .
- the display device includes a substrate 3210, a peripheral driver circuit 3211, a pixel portion 3212, an FPC 3213, and an FPC 3214. External signals and power supply potentials are input into the peripheral driver circuit 3211 from the FPC 3213. Output from the peripheral driver circuit 3211 is input into wires in the row and column directions which are connected to the pixels included in the pixel portion 3212.
- a display panel of the display device of the invention can have various structures, and thus is not limited to the structures described in this specification.
- FIGS. 44A to 44C show exemplary circuit diagrams in this embodiment mode. Note that the circuit diagram is not limited to the ones shown in FIGS. 44A to 44C .
- the circuit diagrams illustrated in FIGS. 44A to 44C are the circuit diagrams using only n-channel transistors. By constructing a circuit which constitutes a pixel by using only n-channel transistors, a display device which can be formed through a simple process and can accommodate a large substrate can be provided. Hereinafter, specific examples of them are described.
- FIG. 44A shows a circuit configuration.
- a first transistor 4401, a second transistor 4402, and a light-emitting element 4406 are disposed.
- a signal line 4403 to which video signals are input is connected to a gate of the second transistor 4402 through the first transistor 4401.
- a gate of the first transistor 4401 is connected to a scan line 4407.
- the second transistor 4402 and a light-emitting element 4406 are connected between a first power supply line 4404 and a second power supply line 4405. Current flows from the first power supply line 4404 to the second power supply line 4405.
- the light-emitting element 4406 emits light in accordance with the amount of current flowing thereto.
- a storage capacitor may be provided in order to hold video signals input to the gate of the second transistor 4402.
- the storage capacitor may be provided either between the gate of the second transistor 4402 and a drain of the second transistor 4402, or between the gate of the second transistor 4402 and a source of the second transistor 4402.
- the storage capacitor may be provided between the gate of the second transistor 4402 and another wire (a dedicated wire, a scan line of a pixel in the preceding row, or the like).
- the storage capacitor may be replaced by the gate capacitance of the second transistor 4402. Note that the second transistor 4402 and the first transistor 4401 are n-channel transistors.
- FIG 44B shows another circuit configuration of this embodiment mode.
- a first transistor 6001, a second transistor 6002, a third transistor 6009 (also called a storage transistor), a storage capacitor 6010, and a light-emitting element 6006 are disposed.
- a signal line 6003 to which video signals are input is connected to a source of the second transistor 6002 through the first transistor 6001.
- a gate of the first transistor 6001 is connected to a scan line 6007.
- the second transistor 6002 and a light-emitting element 6006 are connected between a first power supply line 6004 and a second power supply line 6005. Current flows from the first power supply line 6004 to the second power supply line 6005.
- the light-emitting element 6006 emits light in accordance with the amount of current flowing thereto.
- the storage capacitor 6010 is disposed between a gate and the source of the second transistor 6002, and the third transistor 6009 is connected between the gate and a drain of the second transistor 6002.
- a gate of the third transistor 6009 is connected to the scan line
- a current source circuit 6008 is disposed in a signal line driver circuit.
- the current source circuit 6008 supplies a current to a pixel in accordance with the size of a video signal.
- a video signal which is supplied to the source signal line 6003 upon selection of the scan line 6007 is input to the second transistor 6002.
- no current flows into the light-emitting element 6006 because of the potential relationship between the first power supply line 6004 and the second power supply line 6005, since the potential of the first power supply line 6004 is changed.
- a gate-source voltage of the second transistor 6002 with a required level is held in the storage capacitor 6010 in accordance with the size of a video signal.
- the scan line 6007 is turned into a non-selection state, so that the charges accumulated in the storage capacitor 6010 are held. Accordingly, the gate-source voltage of the second transistor 6002 does not change even when the drain potential or the source potential of the second transistor 6002 changes. Then, the potential of the first power supply line 6004 returns to a former level, so that a current with an amount corresponding to a video signal flows through the second transistor 6002 to be delivered to the light-emitting element 6006.
- FIG. 44C shows another circuit configuration of this embodiment mode.
- a first transistor 7001, a second transistor 7002, a third transistor 7009, a storage capacitor 7010, and a light-emitting element 7006 are disposed.
- a signal line 7003 to which video signals are input is connected to a gate of the second transistor 7002 through the first transistor 7001.
- a gate of the first transistor 7001 is connected to a first scan line 7007.
- the second transistor 7002 and a light-emitting element 7006 are connected between a first power supply line 7004 and a second power supply line 7005. Current flows from the first power supply line 7004 to the second power supply line 7005.
- the light-emitting element 7006 emits light in accordance with the amount of current flowing thereto.
- the storage capacitor 7010 is disposed between the gate and a source of the second transistor 7002, and the third transistor 7009 is connected between the gate and a drain of the second transistor 7002.
- a gate of the third transistor 7009 is connected to a second scan line 7016.
- the third transistor 7009 is turned on in response to a signal input from the second scan line 7016. Then, a gate-source voltage of the second transistor 7002 which has a level equal to the threshold voltage of the second transistor 7002 is held in the storage capacitor 7010. Therefore, variations in the threshold voltage of each driving voltage can be corrected in advance. Note that a voltage higher than the threshold voltage of the transistor may be held in the storage capacitor 7010 in advance by increasing the potential of the second power supply line 7005 only for an instant.
- a video signal supplied to the signal line 7003 is input to the gate of the second transistor 7002. Then, a current corresponding to the size of a video signal flows through the second transistor 7002 to be delivered to the light-emitting element 7006.
- the second transistor may be operated only in the saturation region, operated both in the saturation region and the linear region, or operated only in the liner region.
- the second transistor In the case where the second transistor is operated only in the linear region, it roughly operates as a switch. Therefore, fluctuations of characteristics of the second transistor due to the deterioration, temperature, and the like will have few effects on the switching operation. In the case where the second transistor is operated only in the linear region, whether to flow a current into the light-emitting element 7006 or not is often controlled digitally. In that case, a time gray-scale method, an area gray-scale method, and the like may be combined in order to achieve multi-gray scales.
- FIGS. 42A and 42B show examples of a top-gate transistor
- FIGS. 43A and 43B and FIGS. 49A and 49B show examples of a bottom-gate transistor.
- FIG. 42A shows a cross section of a staggered transistor which uses amorphous silicon as a semiconductor layer.
- a base film 7602 is formed over a substrate 7601.
- a pixel electrode 7603 is formed over the base film 7602.
- a first electrode 7604 is formed with the same material and in the same layer as the pixel electrode 7603.
- any of a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate, and the like can be used as a substrate.
- a single layer of aluminum nitride (AlN), silicon oxide (SiO 2 ), silicon oxynitride (SiO x N y ), or the like, or stacked layers thereof can be used as the base film 7602.
- Wires 7605 and 7606 are formed over the base film 7602, and the edge of the pixel electrode 7603 is covered with the wire 7605.
- N-type semiconductor layers 7607 and 7608 each having n-type conductivity are formed over the wires 7605 and 7606, respectively.
- a semiconductor layer 7609 is formed between the wires 7605 and 7606, and over the base film 7602. A part of the semiconductor layer 7609 is extended to partially cover the n-type semiconductor layers 7607 and 7608.
- the semiconductor layer 7609 is formed of a non-crystalline semiconductor film which is made of amorphous silicon (a-Si:H), a microcrystalline semiconductor ( ⁇ -Si:H), or the like.
- a gate insulating film 7610 is formed over the semiconductor layer 7609.
- an insulating film 7611 which is formed with the same material and in the same layer as the gate insulating film 7610 is formed over the first electrode 7604.
- the gate insulating film 7610 is formed of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or the like.
- a gate electrode 7612 is formed over the gate insulating film 7610.
- a second electrode 7613 which is formed with the same material and in the same layer as the gate electrode 7612 is formed over the first electrode 7604 with the insulating film 7611 sandwiched therebetween.
- a storage capacitor 7619 is formed.
- An interlayer insulating film 7614 is formed covering the edge of the pixel electrode 7603, a driving transistor 7618, and the storage capacitor 7619.
- a light-emitting layer 7615 and an opposite electrode 7616 are formed over the interlayer insulating film 7614 and the pixel electrode 7603 positioned in an opening of the interlayer insulating film 7614.
- a light-emitting element 7617 is formed in a region where the light-emitting layer 7615 is sandwiched between the pixel electrode 7603 and the opposite electrode 7616.
- the first electrode 7604 shown in FIG. 42A may be replaced by a first electrode 7620 as shown in FIG 42B .
- the first electrode 7620 is formed with the same material and in the same layer as the wires 7605 and 7606.
- FIGS. 43A and 43B show partial cross sections of a display panel having a bottom-gate transistor which uses amorphous silicon as a semiconductor layer.
- a base film 7702 is formed over a substrate 7701. Further, a gate electrode 7703 is formed over the base film 7702. In addition, a first electrode 7704 is formed with the same material and in the same layer as the gate electrode 7703. As a material of the gate electrode 7703, polysilicon doped with phosphorus can be used. Not only polycrystalline silicon, but also silicide which is a compound of a metal and silicon may be used as well.
- a gate insulating film 7705 is formed covering the gate electrode 7703 and the first electrode 7704.
- the gate insulating film 7705 is formed of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or the like.
- a semiconductor layer 7706 is formed over the gate insulating film 7705.
- a semiconductor layer 7707 is formed with the same material and in the same layer as the semiconductor layer 7706.
- any of a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate, and the like can be used as a substrate.
- a single layer of aluminum nitride (AlN), silicon oxide (SiO 2 ), silicon oxynitride (SiO x N y ), or the like, or stacked layers thereof can be used as the base film 7702.
- N-type semiconductor layers 7708 and 7709 each having n-type conductivity are formed over the semiconductor layer 7706, while an n-type semiconductor layer 7710 is formed over the semiconductor layer 7707.
- Wires 7711, 7712, and 7713 are formed over the n-type semiconductor layers 7708, 7709, and 7710, respectively, and the conductive layer 7713 which is formed with the same material and in the same layer as the wires 7711 and 7712 is formed over the n-type semiconductor layer 7710.
- a second electrode is formed of the semiconductor layer 7707, the n-type semiconductor layer 7710, and the conductive layer 7713. Note that a storage capacitor 7720 is formed in a region where the gate insulating film 7705 is sandwiched between the second electrode and the first electrode 7704.
- a part of the wire 7711 is extended, and a pixel electrode 7714 is formed in contact with the top surface of the extended portion of the wire 7711.
- An insulator 7715 is formed covering the edge of the pixel electrode 7714, a driving transistor 7719, and the storage capacitor 7720.
- a light-emitting layer 7716 and an opposite electrode 7717 are formed over the pixel electrode 7714 and the insulator 7715, and a light-emitting element 7718 is formed in a region where the light-emitting layer 7716 is sandwiched between the pixel electrode 7714 and the opposite electrode 7717.
- the semiconductor layer 7707 and the n-type semiconductor 7710 which partially function as a second electrode of the storage capacitor are not necessarily provided. That is, only the conductive layer 7713 may be used as the second electrode, so that the storage capacitor has a structure where a gate insulating film is sandwiched between the first electrode 7704 and the conductive layer 7713.
- a storage capacitor 7720 as shown in FIG. 43B can be formed, which has a structure where the gate insulating film 7705 is sandwiched between the first electrode 7704 and a second electrode 7721 which is formed of the same material and in the same layer as the pixel electrode 7714.
- FIGS. 43A and 43B show inversely staggered transistors with a channel-etched structure
- a transistor with a channel-protective structure may be employed as well.
- a transistor with a channel-protective structure shown in FIG 49A is different from the driving transistor 7719 with a channel-etched structure shown in FIG 43A in that an insulator 7801 serving as an etching mask is provided over a channel formation region in the semiconductor layer 7706. Portions common to FIGS. 49A and 43A are denoted by common reference numerals.
- a transistor with a channel-protective structure shown in FIG 49B is different from the driving transistor 7719 with a channel-etched structure shown in FIG. 43B in that an insulator 7802 serving as an etching mask is provided over a channel formation region in the semiconductor layer 7706. Portions common to FIGS. 49B and 43B are denoted by common reference numerals.
- an amorphous semiconductor film for a semiconductor layer e.g., a channel formation region, a source region, or a drain region
- manufacturing cost can be reduced.
- an amorphous semiconductor film can be applied by using the pixel configurations shown in FIGS. 44A to 44C .
- FIG 47A is a top view of a pixel portion before being sealed.
- FIG. 47B is a cross-sectional view taken along a chain dash line A-A' in FIG 47A
- FIG 47C is a cross-sectional view taken along a chain dash line B-B' in FIG. 47A .
- a plurality of first electrodes 2113 are disposed in stripe patterns at even intervals over a substrate 2110.
- a partition wall 2114 having openings corresponding to the respective pixels is provided over the first electrode 2113.
- the partition wall 2114 having openings is formed of a light-shielding material (black pigment, a photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic material in which carbon black is dispersed (e.g., polyimide, acrylic, polyamide, polyimide amide, resist, or benzocyclobutene), or an SOG film (e.g., a SiO x film containing an alkyl group)).
- a light-shielding material black pigment, a photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic material in which carbon black is dispersed
- SOG film e.g., a SiO x film containing an alkyl group
- a material such as COLOR MOSAIC ® CK (registered trademark of FUJIFILM OLIN Co., Ltd) is used for the partition wall 2114 having openings.
- the partition wall 2114 having openings functions as a black matrix (BM). Note that the opening corresponding to each pixel functions as a light-emitting region 2121.
- a plurality of parallel partition walls 2122 with inversely tapered shapes are provided, crossing the first electrodes 2113.
- the inversely tapered partition walls 2122 are formed by photolithography using a positive photosensitive resin by which unexposed regions remain as patterns, so that lower portions of the patterns are etched more by controlling the quantity of exposure light or the developing time.
- the inversely tapered partition walls 2122 may also be formed with the aforementioned light-shielding material so as to further improve the contrast.
- FIG 48 shows a perspective view immediately after forming the plurality of parallel partition walls 2122 with inversely tapered shapes. Note that common portions to FIGS. 48 and 47A to 47C are denoted by common reference numerals.
- the height of the inversely tapered partition walls 2122 is set to be higher than the thickness of a film containing an organic compound and a conductive film.
- a film containing an organic compound and a conductive film are stacked over the first substrate having the structure shown in FIG. 48 , they are separated into a plurality of regions which are electrically insulated from each other, thereby light-emitting layers and second electrodes 2116 are formed.
- the second electrodes 2116 are parallel striped electrodes which extend in the direction of crossing the first electrodes 2113. Note that the film containing an organic compound and the conductive film are also formed over the inversely tapered partition walls 2122; however, they are separated from light-emitting layers 2115R, 2115G, and 2115B, and the second electrodes 2116.
- a first light-emitting element R1 of the invention corresponds to the light-emitting layer 2115R; a third light-emitting element G1 of the invention corresponds to the light-emitting layer 2115G; and a fifth light-emitting element B1 of the invention corresponds to the light-emitting layer 2115B.
- the second light-emitting element R2 of the invention corresponds to a region below the light-emitting layer 2115R in FIG.
- the fourth light-emitting element G2 of the invention corresponds to a region below the light-emitting layer 2115G in FIG 47A
- the sixth light-emitting element B2 of the invention corresponds to a region below the light-emitting layer 2115B in FIG 47A .
- either a material or thickness of the respective light-emitting elements may be varied, or color filters or color conversion layers having different transmission properties may be used.
- description is made of the light-emitting layers 2115R, 2115G, and 2115B, and not the whole pixels will be described.
- An example shown herein is a case where the light-emitting layers 2115R, 2115G, and 2115B are selectively formed to form a light-emitting device capable of a full color display with which three kinds of light emission (R, G, and B) are obtained.
- the light-emitting layers 2115R, 2115G, and 2115B are formed in stripe patterns which are parallel with each other.
- Sealing of the light-emitting elements is carried out by attaching a second substrate to the first substrate with a sealant.
- a protective film for covering the second electrodes 2116 may also be formed if necessary.
- the second substrate is preferably a substrate having a high barrier property against moisture.
- a drying agent may be disposed in a region surrounded by a sealant if necessary.
- FIG 50 shows a top view of a light-emitting module on which an FPC and the like are mounted after sealing.
- a light-emitting device in this specification means an image display device, a light-emitting device, or a light source (including an illuminating device).
- a light-emitting device includes a module to which a connector such as an FPC (Flexible Printed Circuit), a TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) tape, or a TCP (Tape Carrier Package) is attached, a module where an end of the TAB tape or the TCP is provided with a printed wiring board, or a module where an IC (Integrated Circuit) is directly mounted on light-emitting elements by COG (Chip On Glass).
- a connector such as an FPC (Flexible Printed Circuit), a TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) tape, or a TCP (Tape Carrier Package) is attached
- a module where an end of the TAB tape or the TCP is provided with a printed wiring board
- COG Chip On Glass
- a first substrate 5001 and a second substrate 5010 are attached with a sealant 5011 so as to face each other.
- the sealant 5011 may be a photo-curing resin, and is preferably a material with few degasification and a low hygroscopic property.
- fillers spacers in stick or fiber forms
- spherical spacers may be added to the sealant 5011.
- the second substrate 5010 is preferably formed of a material having the same thermal expansion coefficient as the first substrate 5001, and glass (including quartz glass) or plastic can be used.
- column signal lines and row signal lines cross at right angles with each other.
- the first electrode 2113 in FIGS. 47A to 47C corresponds to a column signal line 5002 in FIG 5 ; the second electrode 2116 in FIGS. 47A to 47C corresponds to a row signal line 5003; and the inversely tapered partition wall 2122 in FIG. 47C corresponds to a partition wall 5004.
- a light-emitting layer is sandwiched between the column signal line 5002 and the row signal line 5003, and one intersection 5005 corresponds to one pixel.
- the row signal line 5003 is electrically connected on its end to a connecting wire 5008, and the connecting wire 5008 is connected to an FPC 5009b through an input terminal 5007.
- the column signal line 5002 is connected to an FPC 5009a through an input terminal 5006.
- an optical film such as a polarizing plate, a circularly polarizing light plate (including an elliptically polarizing plate), a retardation plate (a ⁇ /4 plate or a ⁇ /2 plate), or a color filter may be provided as appropriate on the light-emission surface.
- the polarizing plate or the circularly polarizing plate may be provided with an anti-reflection film.
- anti-glare treatment may be applied to the polarizing plate or the circularly polarizing plate by forming irregularities on the surface in order to diffuse reflected light and reduce glare.
- anti-reflection treatment by thermal treatment may be applied to the polarizing pate or the circularly polarizing plate.
- hard-coat treatment may be further applied for protection against external shocks.
- a polarizing plate or a circularly polarizing plate is used, the light extraction efficiency is decreased.
- the polarizing plate or the circularly polarizing plate itself is expensive and easily deteriorates.
- stray light from the light-emitting elements is absorbed or shielded by providing black partition walls (also called banks or partitions) which serve as a black matrix (BM) between pixels on the side of the substrate where light-emitting elements are provided, thereby the contrast of a display can be improved.
- black partition walls also called banks or partitions
- BM black matrix
- the light-emitting elements described in the aforementioned embodiment modes are mainly organic electroluminescence (EL: Electro Luminescence) elements, the invention is not limited to these.
- it may be a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device), a PDP (Plasma Display Panel), an FED (Field Emission Display), an SED (Surface-conduction Electron-emitter Display) which is one of the FEDs, an electrophoretic display device (electronic paper), or a piezoelectric ceramic display.
- DMD Digital Micromirror Device
- PDP Plasma Display Panel
- FED Field Emission Display
- SED Surface-conduction Electron-emitter Display
- electrophoretic display device electrophoretic display device
- piezoelectric ceramic display a piezoelectric ceramic display.
- elements whose colors can be recognized with light traveling therethrough can perform a display through color filters as described in Embodiment Mode 3.
- the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in the first and second pixels are varied from each other; the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 in the third and fourth pixels are varied from each other; and the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 in the fifth and sixth pixels are varied from each other.
- coordinates on the chromaticity diagram may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in the first and second pixels; between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 in the third and fourth pixels; and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 in the fifth and sixth pixels, respectively.
- elements of a self-luminous type can perform display by converting colors with a fluorescent material and the like.
- the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in the first and second pixels are varied from each other; the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 in the third and fourth pixels are varied from each other; and the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 in the fifth and sixth pixels are be varied from each other.
- coordinates on the chromaticity diagram may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in the first and second pixels; between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 in the third and fourth pixels; and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 in the fifth and sixth pixels, respectively.
- the display device of the invention can be applied to various electronic devices. Specifically, it can be applied to a display portion of an electronic device.
- electronic devices include a video camera, a digital camera, a goggle display, a navigation system, an audio reproducing device (e.g., a car audio, an audio component set, or the like), a computer, a game machine, a portable information terminal (e.g., a mobile computer, a mobile phone, a portable game machine, an electronic book, or the like), an image reproducing device provided with a recording medium (specifically, a device for reproducing a recording medium such as a digital versatile disc (DVD) and having a display for displaying the reproduced image), and the like.
- a recording medium specifically, a device for reproducing a recording medium such as a digital versatile disc (DVD) and having a display for displaying the reproduced image
- FIG. 38A shows a display which includes a housing 38101, a supporting base 38102, a display portion 38103, and the like.
- a display device having the pixel configuration of the invention can be used for the display portion 38103.
- the display includes all of information display devices such as those for personal computers, television broadcast reception, and advertisement display.
- the display which uses the display device of the invention for the display portion 38103 can express bright colors.
- a display panel which can express bright colors can be provided.
- an amorphous semiconductor e.g., amorphous silicon (a-Si:H)
- a-Si:H amorphous silicon
- the driver circuit on the periphery of the pixel portion may be formed in an IC chip so that it is mounted on the display panel by COG or the like as shown in FIG. 31B and FIG. 32B .
- using an amorphous semiconductor makes it easier to increase the size of a display.
- FIG 38B shows a camera which includes a main body 38201, a display portion 38202, an image receiving portion 38203, operating keys 38204, an external connecting port 38205, a shutter 38206, and the like.
- a digital camera which uses the display device of the invention for the display portion 38202 can express bright colors.
- a signal line driver circuit which operates at a high speed in an IC chip while forming a scan line driver circuit which operates at a relatively low speed on the same substrate as a pixel portion by using transistors of single conductivity type, high performance and cost reduction can be achieved.
- an amorphous semiconductor for example amorphous silicon for a semiconductor layer of a transistor used for the scan line driver circuit which is formed over the same substrate as the pixel portion, further cost reduction can be achieved.
- FIG 38C shows a computer which includes a main body 38301, a housing 38302, a display portion 38303, a keyboard 38304, an external connecting port 38305, a pointing device 38306, and the like.
- a computer which uses the display device of the invention for the display portion 38303 can express bright colors.
- FIG. 38D shows a mobile computer which includes a main body 38401, a display portion 38402, a switch 38403, operating keys 38404, an infrared port 38405, and the like.
- a mobile computer which uses the display device of the invention for the display portion 38402 can express bright colors.
- FIG. 38E shows a portable image reproducing device provided with a recording medium (specifically, a DVD player), which includes a main body 38501, a housing 38502, a display portion A38503, a display portion B38504, a recording medium (e.g., DVD) reading portion 38505, operating keys 38506, a speaker portion 38507, and the like.
- the display portion A38503 can mainly display image data
- the display portion B38504 can mainly display textual data.
- An image reproducing device which uses the display device of the invention for the display portions A38503 and B38504 can express bright colors.
- FIG 38F shows a goggle display which includes a main body 38601, a display portion 38602, an earphone 38603, a temple 38604, and the like.
- a goggle display which uses the display device of the invention for the display portion 38602 can express bright colors.
- FIG 38G shows a portable game machine which includes a housing 38701, a display portion 38702, speaker portions 38703, operating keys 38704, a recording medium insert portion 38705, and the like.
- a portable game machine which uses the display device of the invention for the display portion 38702 can express bright colors.
- FIG. 38H shows a digital camera having a television receiving function, which includes a main body 38801, a display portion 38802, operating keys 38803, a speaker 38804, a shutter 38805, an image receiving portion 38806, an antenna 38807, and the like.
- a digital camera having a television receiving function which uses the display device of the invention for the display portion 38802 can express bright colors.
- Such a multi-functional digital camera having a television receiving function is more frequently used for television reception and the like nowadays, and longer operating hours per charge is required.
- low power consumption can be achieved by forming a peripheral driver circuit in an IC chip using a CMOS and the like as shown in FIG 31B or FIG. 32A .
- the invention can be applied to various electronic devices.
- a display panel 3701 is incorporated into a housing 3730 in a freely attachable/detachable manner.
- the shape and size of the housing 3730 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the size of the display panel 3710.
- the housing 3730 to which the display panel 3710 is fixed is fit into a printed wiring board 3731 so as to be assembled as a module.
- the display panel 3701 is connected to the printed wiring board 3731 through an FPC 3713.
- a speaker 3732, a microphone 3733, a transmission/reception circuit 3734, and a signal processing circuit 3735 including a CPU, a controller, and the like are formed on the printed wiring board 3731.
- Such a module is combined with an input means 3736 and a battery 3737, and then incorporated into housings 3739.
- a pixel portion of the display panel 3701 is disposed so that it can be seen from an open window formed in the housing 3739.
- the display panel 3701 may be constructed such that a part of peripheral driver circuits (e.g., a driver circuit having a low operating frequency among a plurality of driver circuits) is formed over the same substrate as a pixel portion by using TFTs, while another part of the peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a high operating frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) is formed in an IC chip. Then, the IC chip may be mounted on the display panel 3701 by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to a glass substrate by TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed wiring board.
- TAB Pe Automated Bonding
- the display device shown in the aforementioned embodiment can be applied to the pixel portion as appropriate.
- FIG 31B or FIG. 32A a structure as shown in FIG 31B or FIG. 32A may be used, where a pixel portion is formed over a substrate with TFTs, and all of the peripheral driver circuits are formed in IC chips to be mounted on the display panel by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like.
- COG Chip On Glass
- the structure shown in this embodiment is only an exemplary mobile phone, and therefore, the display device of the invention can be applied to not only the mobile phone with the aforementioned structure but also mobile phones with various structures.
- the display device of the invention bright colors can be expressed.
- FIG. 33 shows an EL module combining a display panel 3301 and a circuit board 3311.
- the display panel 3301 includes a pixel portion 3302, a scan line driver circuit 3303, and a signal line driver circuit 3304.
- a control circuit 3312, a signal dividing circuit 3313, and the like are formed over the circuit board 3311, for example.
- the display panel 3301 and the circuit board 3311 are connected with a connecting wire 3314.
- the connecting wire 3314 can be an FPC or the like.
- the display panel 3301 may be constructed such that a part of peripheral driver circuits (e.g., a driver circuit having a low operating frequency among a plurality of driver circuits) is formed over the same substrate as a pixel portion by using TFTs, while another part of the peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a high operating frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) is formed in an IC chip, so that the IC chip is mounted on the display panel 3301 by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like.
- the IC chip may be mounted on the display panel 3301 by TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed wiring board. Note that FIG.
- FIG. 30A shows an exemplary structure where a part of the peripheral driver circuits is formed over the same substrate as the pixel portion, while another part of the peripheral driver circuits is formed in an IC chip, so that the IC chip is mounted on the substrate by COG or the like.
- a pixel portion may be formed over a glass substrate with TFTs, while all of the peripheral driver circuits may be formed in IC chips to be mounted on the display panel by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like.
- COG Chip On Glass
- FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing the main configuration of an EL television receiver.
- a tuner 3401 receives video signals and audio signals.
- the video signals are processed by a video signal amplifier circuit 3402, a video signal processing circuit 3403 which converts a signal output from the video signal amplifier circuit 3402 into a color signal corresponding to each color of red, green, and blue, and a control circuit 3412 for converting the video signal to be input into a driver circuit.
- the control circuit 3412 outputs signals to each of a scan line driver circuit 3410 and a signal line driver circuit 3404.
- a signal dividing circuit 3413 may be provided between the control circuit 3412 and the signal line driver circuit 3404, so that an input digital signal can be divided into m signals before being output to a display panel 3411.
- audio signals are transmitted to an audio signal amplifier circuit 3405, and an output thereof is supplied to a speaker 3407 through an audio signal processing circuit 3406.
- a control circuit 3408 receives control data on a receiving station (reception frequency) or sound volume from an input portion 3409 and transmits signals to the tuner 3401 as well as the audio signal processing circuit 3406.
- FIG. 35A shows a television receiver incorporating an EL module of a different mode from FIG. 34 .
- a display screen 3502 is formed from an EL module.
- a housing 3501 is provided with a speaker 3503, operating switches 3504, and the like as appropriate.
- FIG 35B shows a television receiver having a wireless and portable display.
- a housing 3512 incorporates a battery and a signal receiver, and the battery drives a display portion 3513 and a speaker portion 3517.
- the battery can be repeatedly charged with a battery charger 3510.
- the battery charger 3510 can transmit/receive video signals, and the video signals from the battery charger 3510 can be delivered to the signal receiver in the display.
- the housing 3512 is controlled with operating keys 3516.
- the device shown in FIG. 35B can also transmit signals from the housing 3512 to the battery charger 3510 by operating the operating key 3516; therefore, it can also be called a video/audio two-way communication device.
- the device can also control communication with another electronic device by operating the operating keys 3516 such that signals are transmitted from the housing 3512 to the battery charger 3510, and another electronic device receives the signals that the battery charger 3510 can transmit. Therefore, the device can also be called a general-purpose remote control device.
- the invention can be applied to the display portion 3513.
- FIG. 36A shows a module combining a display panel 3601 and a printed wiring board 3602.
- the display panel 3601 has a pixel portion 3603 where a plurality of pixels are provided, a first scan line driver circuit 3604, a second scan line driver circuit 3605, and a signal line driver circuit 3606 for supplying a video signal to a selected pixel.
- the printed wiring board 3602 is provided with a controller 3607, a central processing unit (CPU) 3608, a memory 3609, a power supply circuit 3610, an audio processing circuit 3611, a transmission/reception circuit 3612, and the like.
- the printed wiring board 3602 and the display panel 3601 are connected through a flexible printed wiring board (FPC) 3613.
- the printed wiring board 3613 may be provided with a storage capacitor, a buffer circuit, and the like in order to prevent noise interruption on the power supply voltage or signals and also prevent dull signal rising.
- the controller 3607, the audio processing circuit 3611, the memory 3609, the CPU 3608, the power supply circuit 3610, and the like can be mounted on the display panel 3601 by COG (Chip On Glass). By using COG, a scale of the printed wiring board 3602 can be reduced.
- COG Chip On Glass
- control signals are input/output through an I/F portion 3614 (interface) provided on the printed wiring board 3602.
- an antenna port 3615 for transmitting/receiving signals to/from an antenna is provided on the printed wiring board 3602.
- FIG. 36B is a block diagram of the module shown in FIG. 36A .
- This module includes a VRAM 3616, a DRAM 3617, a flash memory 3618, and the like as the memory 3609.
- the VRAM 3616 stores image data to be displayed on the panel
- the DRAM 3617 stores image data or audio data
- the flash memory 3618 stores various programs.
- the power supply circuit 3610 supplies power to operate the display panel 3601, the controller 3607, the CPU 3608, the audio processing circuit 3611, the memory 3609, and the transmission/reception circuit 3612. Depending on the specification of the panel, the power supply circuit 3610 may be provided with a current source.
- the CPU 3608 includes a control signal generation circuit 3620, a decoder 3621, a register 3622, an arithmetic circuit 3623, a RAM 3624, an interface 3619 for the CPU 3608, and the like.
- Various signals input to the CPU 3608 through the interface 3619 are once stored in the register 3622 before being input to the arithmetic circuit 3623, the decoder 3621, and the like.
- the arithmetic circuit 3623 performs operation based on the signals input, and specifies an address for sending various instructions.
- signals input to the decoder 3621 are decoded, and then input to the control signal generation circuit 3620.
- the control signal generation circuit 3620 generates signals containing various instructions based on the signals input, and transmits the signals to an address specified by the arithmetic circuit 3623, specifically to the memory 3609, the transmission/reception circuit 3612, the audio processing circuit 3611, the controller 3607, and the like.
- the memory 3609, the transmission/reception circuit 3612, the audio processing circuit 3611, and the controller 3607 operate in accordance with the respective instructions received. The operation is briefly described below.
- Signals input from an input means 3625 are transmitted to the CPU 3608 mounted on the printed wiring board 3602 through the I/F portion 3614.
- the control signal generation circuit 3620 converts image data stored in the VRAM 3616 into a predetermined format in accordance with the signals transmitted from the input means 3625 which is a pointing device, a keyboard, or the like, and then transmits the data to the controller 3607.
- the controller 3607 processes signals containing image data which are transmitted from the CPU 3608 in accordance with the specification of the panel, and then supplies the data to the display panel 3601. In addition, the controller 3607 generates Hsync signals, Vsync signals, clock signals CLK, AC voltage (AC Cont), and switching signals L/R based on the power supply voltage input from the power supply circuit 3610 and the various signals input from the CPU 3608, and supplies the signals to the display panel 3601.
- the transmission/reception circuit 3612 processes signals which have been transmitted/received as electromagnetic waves at an antenna 3628, and specifically includes high frequency circuits such as an isolator, a bandpass filter, a VCO (Voltage Controlled Oscillator), an LPF (Low Pass Filter), a coupler, and a balun.
- high frequency circuits such as an isolator, a bandpass filter, a VCO (Voltage Controlled Oscillator), an LPF (Low Pass Filter), a coupler, and a balun.
- signals transmitted/received to/from the transmission/reception circuit 3612 signals containing audio data are transmitted to the audio processing circuit 3611 in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 3608.
- the signals containing audio data which are transmitted in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 3608 are demodulated into audio signals in the audio processing circuit 3611 and then transmitted to a speaker 3627. Audio signals transmitted from a microphone 3626 are modulated in the audio processing circuit 3611, and then transmitted to the transmission/reception circuit 3612 in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 3608.
- the controller 3607, the CPU 3608, the power supply circuit 3610, the audio processing circuit 3611, and the memory 3609 can be integrated as a package of this embodiment.
- the invention is not limited to a television receiver, and can be used for various applications such as a monitor of a personal computer, an information display board at the train station or airport, or a particularly large display medium such as an advertisement display board on the street.
- a monitor of a personal computer an information display board at the train station or airport
- a particularly large display medium such as an advertisement display board on the street.
- a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion can be incorporated in a moving object, a building, or the like.
- FIGS. 55A and 55B each show a moving object incorporating a display device, as an exemplary display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion.
- FIG. 55A shows a display panel 9702 which is attached to a glass door in a train car body 9701, as an exemplary moving object incorporating a display device.
- the display panel 9702 shown in FIG. 55A which has the display device of the invention as a display portion can easily switch images displayed on the display portion in response to external signals. Therefore, images on the display panel can be periodically switched in accordance with the time cycle through which passengers' ages or sex vary, thereby more efficient advertising effect can be expected.
- the position for setting a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is not limited to a glass door of a train car body as shown in FIG. 55A , and thus a display panel can be applied to anywhere by changing the shape of the display panel.
- FIG 55B shows an example thereof.
- FIG. 55B shows an interior view of a train car body.
- display panels 9703 attached to glass windows and a display panel 9704 hung on the ceiling are shown in addition to the display panels 9702 attached to the glass doors shown in FIG. 55A .
- the display panels 9703 each having the display device of the invention as a display portion has self-luminous display elements. Therefore, by displaying images for advertisement in rush hours, while displaying no images in off-peak hours, outside views can be seen from the train windows.
- the display panel 9704 having the display device of the invention as a display portion can be flexibly bent by providing switching elements such as organic transistors over a substrate in a film form, and images can be displayed on the display panel 9704 by driving self-luminous display elements.
- FIG 56 Another example where a display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion is applied to a moving object incorporating a display device is described with reference to FIG 56 .
- FIG. 56 shows a moving object incorporating a display device, as an exemplary display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion.
- FIG 56 shows a display panel 9901 which is incorporated in a body 9902 of a car, as an exemplary moving object incorporating a display device.
- the display panel 9901 having the display device of the invention as a display portion shown in FIG. 56 is incorporated in a body of a car, and displays information on the operation of the car or information input from outside of the car on an on-demand basis. Further, it has a navigation function to a destination of the car.
- the position for setting a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is not limited to a front portion of a car body as shown in FIG 56 , and thus a display panel can be applied to anywhere such as glass windows or doors by changing the shape of the display panel.
- FIGS. 57A and 57B Another example where a display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion is applied to a moving object incorporating a display device is described with reference to FIGS. 57A and 57B .
- FIGS. 57A and 57B each show a moving object incorporating a display device, as an exemplary display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion.
- FIG. 57A shows a display panel 10102 which is incorporated in a part of the ceiling above the passenger's seat inside an airplane body 10101, as an exemplary moving object incorporating a display device.
- the display panel 10102 shown in FIG 57A which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is fixed on the airplane body 10101 with a hinge portion 10103, so that passengers can see the display panel 10102 with the help of a telescopic motion of the hinge portion 10103.
- the display panel 10102 has a function of displaying information as well as a function of an advertisement or amusement means with the operation of passengers.
- the display panel 10102 in the airplane body 10101 by folding the hinge portion 10103 as shown in FIG 57B , safety during the airplane's takeoff and landing can be secured. Note that by lighting display elements of the display panel in an emergency, the display panel can be also utilized as a guide light.
- the position for setting a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is not limited to the ceiling of the airplane body 10101, and thus a display panel can be applied to anywhere such as seats or doors by changing the shape of the display panel.
- the display panel may be set on the backside of a seat so that a passenger on the rear seat can operate and view the display panel.
- this embodiment has illustrated a train car body, a car body, and an airplane body as exemplary moving objects
- the invention is not limited to these, and can be applied to motorbikes, four-wheeled vehicles (including cars, buses, and the like), trains (including monorails, railroads, and the like), ships and vessels, and the like.
- a display panel having the display device of the invention By employing a display panel having the display device of the invention, downsizing and power saving of a display panel can be achieved, as well as a moving object having a display medium with an excellent operation can be provided.
- images displayed on a plurality of display panels incorporated in a moving object can be switched all at once, in particular, the invention is quite advantageous to be applied to advertising media for unspecified number of customers, or information display boards in an emergency.
- FIG 58 An example where a display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion is applied to a structure is described with reference to FIG 58 .
- FIG. 58 illustrates an example where a flexible display panel capable of displaying images is realized by providing switching elements such as organic transistors over a substrate in a film form, and driving self-luminous display elements, as an exemplary display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion.
- a display panel is provided on a curved surface of an outside columnar object such as a telephone pole as a structure, and specifically, shown here is a structure where display panels 9802 are attached to telephone poles 9801 which are columnar objects.
- the display panels 9802 shown in FIG 58 are positioned at about a half height of the telephone poles, so as to be higher than the eye level of humans.
- images on the display panels 9802 can be recognized.
- viewers can recognize the displayed information or advertisement.
- the display panels 9802 provided on the telephone poles 9801 in FIG. 58 can easily display the same images by using external signals; therefore, quite effective information display and advertising effects can be expected.
- self-luminous display elements are provided as display elements in the display panel of the invention, it can be effectively used as a highly visible display medium even at night.
- FIG. 59 Another example where a display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion is applied to a structure is described with reference to FIG. 59 , which differs from FIG. 58 .
- FIG. 59 shows another application example of a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion.
- a display panel 10001 which is incorporated in the sidewall of a prefabricated bath unit 10002 is shown.
- the display panel 10001 shown in FIG 59 which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is incorporated in the prefabricated bath unit 10002, so that a bather can view the display panel 10001.
- the display panel 10001 has a function of displaying information as well as a function of an advertisement or amusement means with the operation of a bather.
- the position for setting a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is not limited to the sidewall of the prefabricated bath unit 10002 shown in FIG 59 , and thus a display panel can be applied to anywhere by changing the shape of the display panel, such that it can be incorporated in a part of a mirror or a bathtub.
- FIG. 60 shows an example where a television set having a large display portion is provided in a building.
- FIG. 60 includes a housing 8010, a display portion 8011, a remote controlling device 8012 which is an operating portion, a speaker portion 8013, and the like.
- a display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion is applied to the manufacturing of the display portion 8011.
- the television set in FIG. 60 is incorporated in a building as a wall-hanging television set, and can be set without requiring a large space.
- this embodiment has illustrated a telephone pole, a prefabricated bath unit, an inner side of a building, and the like as exemplary structures, this embodiment is not limited to these, and can be applied to any structures which can incorporate a display device.
- a display device of the invention for a display panel, a structure having a display medium which can express bright colors can be provided.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Ceramic Engineering (AREA)
- Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
- Control Of El Displays (AREA)
- Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
- Control Of Indicators Other Than Cathode Ray Tubes (AREA)
Description
- The present invention relates to a display device equipped with a light-emitting element or an electro-optical element in a pixel. In particular, the present invention relates to a display device having a layer including an organic material, a fluorescent material, or a phosphorescent material in the light-emitting element.
- A display device having a light-emitting element which includes a layer of an organic material between a pair of electrodes and emits light when a current is supplied between the electrodes has been developed. Such a display device has an advantage in reducing thickness and weight, has high visibility due to the self-luminance, and has high response speed. In addition, since power consumption of such a display device may potentially be made very small, it has been actively developed as a device of next generation, and some of such devices have been put into practical use.
- In the display device using the light-emitting element having the aforementioned configuration, high image quality and widening of a color gamut have been expected. For example, a display device which can reproduce and display accurate colors in editing in a printing operation, seeing and listening to a work of art, movies, or the like, and catching a real color exactly in telemedicine, has been strongly expected. In view of this, in order to improve a color gamut which can be viewed by human eyes, research to optimize a structure such as improvement of color purity and widening of a color gamut has been carried out (for example, see Reference 1: Published Japanese translation of PCT International Publication for Patent Application No.
2001-039554 - However, there is still a surplus in a color gamut which can be viewed by human eyes, and thus, a color reproduction area of a display device so far is still insufficient.
FIG 39 shows the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram which is established by COMMISSION INTERNATIONALE DE L'ECLAIRAGE (INTERNATIONAL COMMISSION ON ILLLTMINATION: CIE) managing standards of color internationally. In an outer boundary of the diagram, a point which is near the rightmost end corresponds to an emission spectrum of 700 nm of red monochromatic light; a point which is near the uppermost end corresponds to an emission spectrum of 546.1 nm of green monochromatic light; and a point which is near the lowermost end corresponds to an emission spectrum of 435.8 nm of blue monochromatic light. In this chromaticity diagram, brightness (chroma) is lower in the inner side since the outer boundary of the graph (a visible area) corresponds to an emission spectrum of monochromatic light while the inner side thereof corresponds to a combination color obtained by combining different kinds of monochromatic light. In the case of expressing a color by an additive color mixture, a plurality of standard colors can reproduce only a color which lies in a position surrounded with a polygon formed of points which are shown in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram. - When red (R) is shown by the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram, human eyes can perceive a color which has a coordinate near a right region of the chromaticity diagram (a region surrounded with the circumference of the chromaticity diagram and a
dotted line 3901 inFIG. 39 ) as red. In addition, when green (G) is shown by the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram, human eyes can perceive a color which has a coordinate near an upper region of the chromaticity diagram (a region surrounded with the circumference of the chromaticity diagram and adotted line 3902 inFIG. 39 ) as green. When blue (B) is shown by the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram, human eyes can perceive a color which has a coordinate near a lower region of the chromaticity diagram (a region surrounded with the circumference of the chromaticity diagram and dottedlines FIG. 39 ) as blue. As a specific example, a hi-vision (high definition television broadcasting; HDTV) standard can be given, which has chromaticity coordinates of R (x = 0.67, y = 0.33), G (x = 0.21, y = 0.71), and B (x = 0.14, y = 0.08) (atriangle 3905 inFIG. 39 ). - According to the method disclosed in
Reference 1, a color reproduction area can be expanded in directions of arrows inFIG. 39 by increasing color purity, and brightness of colors recognized by human eyes can be increased. However, there is still a surplus in a color gamut which can be viewed by human eyes. Therefore, it is an essential task to expand the color reproduction area by satisfying the surplus in the color gamut which can be viewed by human eyes. - According to
WO 2005/031693 A1 , a first set of primary colors are able to generate very saturated colors. The first set of primary colors defines a first color gamut. A second set of primary colors are located inside the first color gamut and defines a second color gamut and are all less saturated than the first set of primary colors. The second set of primary colors can generate very high brightness levels compared to the first set of primary colors. - Document
US 2004/0113875 A1 describes that a full color display additionally includes at least one in-gamut OLED, for example, a white light-emitting element OLED. - In view of this, it is an object of the invention to accomplish the aforementioned task in a display device equipped with a light-emitting element, so that the color reproduction area can be improved and the color gamut which can be viewed by human eyes can be widened.
- A display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements. Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively. The light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel have different emission spectrums from each other; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel have different emission spectrums from each other; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel have different emission spectrums from each other.
- A display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements. Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively. The light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel emit light with colors of different coordinates from each other in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel emit light with colors of different coordinates from each other in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel emit light with colors of different coordinates from each other in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram.
- A display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements. Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively. The light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel are formed of different materials from each other to have different emission spectrums; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel are formed of different materials from each other to have different emission spectrums; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel are formed of different materials from each other to have different emission spectrums.
- A display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements. Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively. The light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other to have different emission spectrums; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other to have different emission spectrums; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other to have different emission spectrums.
- A display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements. Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively. The first pixel and the second pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, thereby light which has traveled through each of the color filters has a different emission spectrum from each other; the third pixel and the fourth pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, thereby light which has traveled through each of the color filters has a different emission spectrum from each other; and the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, thereby light which has traveled through each of the color filters has a different emission spectrum from each other.
- A display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements. Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively. The light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel are formed of different materials from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel are formed of different materials from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel are formed of different materials from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram.
- A display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements. Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively. The light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel are formed to have different thickness from each other, and emit light with colors of different coordinates in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram.
- A display device in accordance with one aspect of the invention includes a display region having a plurality of picture elements. Each picture element includes: a first pixel and a second pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more; a third pixel and a fourth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; and a fifth pixel and a sixth pixel each including a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively. The first pixel and the second pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, and light that has traveled through one of the color filters has a color of a different coordinate from light that has traveled through the other color filter in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; the third pixel and the fourth pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, and light that has traveled through one of the color filters has a color of a different coordinate from light that has traveled through the other color filter in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; and the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, and light that has traveled through one of the color filters has a color of a different coordinate from light that has traveled through the other color filter in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram.
- Either one of the light-emitting element provided in the first pixel or the light-emitting element provided in the second pixel may have a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.6 or more and 0.35 or less, respectively; either one of the light-emitting element provided in the third pixel or the light-emitting element provided in the fourth pixel may have a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.3 or less and 0.6 or more, respectively; and either one of the light-emitting element provided in the fifth pixel or the light-emitting element provided in the sixth pixel may have a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.15 or less and 0.2 or less, respectively.
- The picture element may include a light-emitting element which emits white light.
- The first pixel and the second pixel may have light-emitting regions with different area dimensions from each other; the third pixel and the fourth pixel may have light-emitting regions with different area dimensions from each other; and the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel may have light-emitting regions with different area dimensions from each other.
- The light-emitting element may be an electroluminescent (EL: Electro Luminescence) element (e.g., an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing organic and inorganic materials).
- Note that a region in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram in this specification corresponds to a region showing visible light in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram which can be recognized by human eyes.
- Note also that a switch described in this specification can employ various types of elements. An electrical switch, a mechanical switch, or the like is given as an example. That is, anything that can control a current flow can be employed, and thus, various types of elements can be employed without limiting to a certain element. For example, it may be a transistor, a diode (e.g., a PN junction diode, a PIN diode, a Schottky diode, or a diode-connected transistor), a thyristor, or a logic circuit combining such elements. Therefore, in the case of employing a transistor as a switch, the polarity (the conductivity type) of the transistor is not particularly limited to a certain type since it operates just as a switch. However, when off-current is preferred to be small, a transistor of a polarity with small off-current is desirably employed. As a transistor with small off-current, there is a transistor provided with an LDD region, a transistor with a multi-gate structure, or the like. In addition, it is desirable that an n-channel transistor be employed when a potential of a source terminal of the transistor being operated as a switch is closer to the low-potential-side power supply (e.g., Vss, GND, or 0 V), while a p-channel transistor be employed when the potential of the source terminal is closer to the high-potential-side power supply (e.g., Vdd). This helps the switch operate efficiently since the absolute value of the gate-source voltage of the transistor can be increased.
- A CMOS switch may also be employed by using both n-channel and p-channel transistors. By employing a CMOS switch, the switch can efficiently operate as a switch since current can flow when either one of the p-channel transistor or the n-channel transistor is turned on. For example, voltage can be appropriately output regardless of whether voltage of an input signal of the switch is high or low. Further, since a voltage amplitude value of a signal for turning on or off the switch can be suppressed, power consumption can be reduced.
- When a transistor is employed as a switch, the switch includes an input terminal (one of either a source terminal or a drain terminal), an output terminal (the other of either the source terminal or the drain terminal), and a terminal for controlling electrical conduction (a gate terminal). On the other hand, when a diode is employed as a switch, the switch may not have a terminal for controlling electrical conduction. Therefore, the number of wires for controlling terminals can be reduced.
- Note that in this specification, the description "being connected" includes a case where elements are electrically connected, a case where elements are functionally connected, and a case where elements are directly connected. Accordingly, in the configurations disclosed in this specification, other elements may be sandwiched between elements having a predetermined connecting relation. For example, one or more elements which enable an electrical connection (e.g., a switch, a transistor, a capacitor t, an inductor, a resistor, or a diode) may be provided. In addition, one or more circuits which enable a functional connection may be provided in addition to the predetermined elements, such as a logic circuit (e.g., an inverter, a NAND circuit, or a NOR circuit), a signal converter circuit (e.g., a DA converter circuit, an AD converter circuit, or a gamma correction circuit), a potential level converter circuit (e.g., a power supply circuit such as a boosting circuit or a voltage lower control circuit, or a level shifter circuit for changing a potential level of an H signal or an L signal), a voltage source, a current source, a switching circuit, or an amplifier circuit (e.g., a circuit which can increase the signal amplitude, the amount of current, or the like, such as an operational amplifier, a differential amplifier circuit, a source follower circuit, or a buffer circuit), a signal generating circuit, a memory circuit, or a control circuit. Alternatively, the elements may be directly connected without interposing other elements or other circuits therebetween.
- When it is obvious that elements are connected without interposing other elements or circuits therebetween, such elements are described as "being directly connected" in this specification. On the other hand, when elements are described as "being electrically connected", the following cases can be considered: a case where such elements are electrically connected (that is, connected by interposing other elements therebetween), a case where such elements are functionally connected (that is, connected by interposing other circuits therebetween), and a case where such elements are directly connected (that is, connected without interposing other elements or other circuits therebetween).
- Note that in this specification, various types of transistors can be applied to a transistor. Therefore, types of transistors which can be applied are not limited to a certain type. For example, a thin film transistor (TFT) including a non-single crystalline semiconductor film typified by amorphous silicon or polycrystalline silicon can be applied. Accordingly, various advantages can be provided that such transistors can be manufactured at a low manufacturing temperature, can be manufactured at low cost, can be formed over a large substrate as well as a light-transmissive substrate, and further, such transistors can transmit light. In addition, the transistors can be formed by using a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, or the like. In addition, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like can be employed. Accordingly, transistors with few variations, transistors with a high current supply capacity, and transistors with a small size can be manufactured, and thereby a circuit with low power consumption can be constructed by using such transistors. Further, a transistor including a compound semiconductor such as ZnO, a-InGaZnO, SiGe, or GaAs, or a thin film transistor obtained by thinning such compound semiconductors can be employed. Accordingly, such transistors can be manufactured at a low manufacturing temperature, can be manufactured at a room temperature, and can be formed directly over a low heat-resistant substrate such as a plastic substrate or a film substrate. A transistor or the like formed by ink-jet method or a printing method may also be employed. Accordingly, such transistors can be manufactured at a room temperature, can be manufactured at a low vacuum, and can be manufactured over a large substrate. In addition, since such transistors can be manufactured without using a mask (reticle), the layout of the transistors can be easily changed. A transistor including an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube, or other transistors can be applied as well. Accordingly, the transistors can be formed over a substrate which can be bent. Note that a non-single crystalline semiconductor film may include hydrogen or halogen. In addition, various types of substrates can be applied to a substrate over which transistors are formed without limiting to a certain type. Accordingly, transistors may be formed over, for example, a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a stainless steel substrate, a substrate made of a stainless steel foil, or the like. In addition, after forming transistors over a substrate, the transistors may be transposed onto another substrate. As for another substrate, a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a stainless steel substrate, a substrate made of a stainless steel foil, or the like may be employed. By using the aforementioned substrates, transistors with excellent properties and with low power consumption can be formed, and thus, a device with high durability and high heat resistance can be formed.
- The structure of a transistor may be various modes. Therefore, the structure of the transistor is not limited to a certain type. For example, a multi-gate structure having two or more gate electrodes may be used. When a multi-gate structure is employed, a structure where channel regions are connected in series is provided; therefore, a structure where a plurality of transistors are connected in series is provided. By employing a multi-gate structure, off-current can be reduced as well as the withstand voltage can be increased to improve the reliability of the transistor, and even if a drain-source voltage fluctuates when the transistor operates in the saturation region, flat characteristics can be provided without causing fluctuations of drain-source current very much. In addition, a structure where gate electrodes are formed above and below a channel may be employed. By using a structure where gate electrodes are formed above and below a channel, the channel region is enlarged to increase the amount of current flowing therethrough, and a depletion layer can be easily formed to improve the S value. When gate electrodes are formed above and below a channel, a structure where a plurality of transistors are connected in parallel is provided.
- In addition, any of the following structures may be employed: a structure where a gate electrode is formed above a channel; a structure where a gate electrode is formed below a channel; a staggered structure; an inversely staggered structure; and a structure where a channel region is divided into a plurality of regions, and the divided regions are connected in parallel or in series. In addition, a channel (or a part of it) may overlap with a source electrode or a drain electrode. By forming a structure where a channel (or a part of it) overlaps with a source electrode or a drain electrode, electric charges can be prevented from gathering locally in a part of the channel, which would otherwise cause an unstable operation. In addition, an LDD (Lightly Doped Drain) region may be provided. By providing an LDD region, off-current can be reduced as well as the withstand voltage can be increased to improve the reliability of the transistor, and even if a drain-source voltage fluctuates when the transistor operates in the saturation region, flat characteristics can be provided without causing fluctuations of a drain-source current very much.
- Note that various types of transistors may be employed in this specification, and such transistors can be formed over various types of substrates. Accordingly, all of the circuits may be formed over a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, a single crystalline substrate, an SOI substrate, or any other substrates. By forming all of the circuits over the same substrate, the number of component parts can be reduced to cut cost, as well as the number of connections to the circuit components can be reduced to improve the reliability. Alternatively, parts of the circuits may be formed over one substrate while the other parts of the circuits may be formed over another substrate. That is, not all of the circuits are required to be formed over the same substrate. For example, parts of the circuits may be formed with transistors over a glass substrate while the other parts of the circuits may be formed over a single crystalline substrate, so that the IC chip is connected to the glass substrate by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate by TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed wiring board. In this manner, by forming parts of the circuits over the same substrate, the number of component parts can be reduced to cut cost, as well as the number of connections to the circuit components can be reduced to improve the reliability. In addition, by forming a portion with a high driving voltage or a portion with high driving frequency which would consume large power over another substrate, increase of power consumption can be prevented.
- Note that a transistor is an element having at least three terminals of a gate, a drain, and a source. The transistor has a channel region between a drain region and a source region, and can supply a current through the drain region, the channel region, and the source region. Here, since the source and the drain of the transistor may change depending on the structure, the operating conditions, and the like of the transistor, it is difficult to define which is a source or a drain. Therefore, in the invention, a region functioning as a source and a drain may not be called the source or the drain. In such a case, for example, one of the source and the drain may be called a first terminal and the other terminal may be called a second terminal.
- Note also that a transistor may be an element having at least three terminals of a base, an emitter, and a collector. In this case also, one of the emitter and the collector may be similarly called a first terminal and the other terminal may be called a second terminal.
- A gate means all of or a part of a gate electrode and a gate wire (also called a gate line, a gate signal line, or the like). A gate electrode means a conductive film which overlaps with a semiconductor forming a channel region, an LDD region, or the like with a gate insulating film sandwiched therebetween. A gate wire means a wire for connecting each gate electrode of each pixel, or a wire for connecting a gate electrode to another wire.
- However, there is a portion functioning as both a gate electrode and a gate wire. Such a region may be called either a gate electrode or a gate wire. That is, there is a region where a gate electrode and a gate wire cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. For example, in the case where a channel region overlaps with an extended gate wire, the overlapped region functions as both a gate wire and a gate electrode. Accordingly, such a region may be called either a gate electrode or a gate wire.
- In addition, a region formed of the same material as a gate electrode and connected to the gate electrode may also be called a gate electrode. Similarly, a region formed of the same material as a gate wire and connected to the gate wire may also be called a gate wire. In a strict sense, such a region may not overlap with a channel region, or may not have a function of connecting to another gate electrode. However, there is a region formed of the same material as a gate electrode or a gate wire and connected to the gate electrode or the gate wire in order to satisfy a sufficient manufacturing margin. Accordingly, such a region may also be called either a gate electrode or a gate wire.
- In a multi-gate transistor, for example, a gate electrode of one transistor is often connected to a gate electrode of another transistor by using a conductive film which is formed of the same material as the gate electrode. Since such a region is a region for connecting a gate electrode to another gate electrode, it may be called a gate wire, while it may also be called a gate electrode since a multi-gate transistor can be considered as one transistor. That is, a region which is formed of the same material as a gate electrode or a gate wire and connected thereto may be called either the gate electrode or the gate wire.
- In addition, for example, a part of a conductive film which connects a gate electrode and a gate wire may also be called either a gate electrode or a gate wire.
- Note that a gate terminal means a part of a gate electrode or a part of a region which is electrically connected to the gate electrode.
- Note also that a source means all of or a part of a source region, a source electrode, and a source wire (also called a source line, a source signal line, or the like). A source region means a semiconductor region containing a large amount of p-type impurities (e.g., boron or gallium) or n-type impurities (e.g., phosphorus or arsenic). Accordingly, a region containing a slight amount of p-type impurities or n-type impurities, namely, an LDD (Lightly Doped Drain) region is not included in the source region. A source electrode is a part of a conductive layer formed of a different material from a source region, and electrically connected to the source region. However, there is a case where a source electrode and a source region are collectively called a source electrode. A source wire is a wire for connecting each source electrode of each pixel, or a wire for connecting a source electrode to another wire.
- However, there is a portion functioning as both a source electrode and a source wire. Such a region may be called either a source electrode or a source wire. That is, there is a region where a source electrode and a source wire cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. For example, in the case where a source region overlaps with an extended source wire, the overlapped region functions as both a source wire and a source electrode. Accordingly, such a region may be called either a source electrode or a source wire.
- In addition, a region formed of the same material as a source electrode and connected to the source electrode, or a portion for connecting a source electrode to another source electrode may be called a source electrode. A part of a source wire which overlaps with a source region may also be called a source electrode. Similarly, a region formed of the same material as a source wire and connected to the source wire may be called a source wire. In a strict sense, such a region may not have a function of connecting to another source electrode. However, there is a region formed of the same material as a source electrode or a source wire, and connected to the source electrode or the source wire in order to satisfy a sufficient manufacturing margin. Accordingly, such a region may also be called either a source electrode or a source wire.
- In addition, for example, a part of a conductive film which connects a source electrode and a source wire may be called either a source electrode or a source wire.
- Note that a source terminal means a part of a source region, a part of a source electrode, or a part of a region electrically connected to the source electrode.
- Note also that the same can be said for a drain.
- In this specification, a semiconductor device means a device having a circuit including semiconductor elements (e.g., transistors or diodes). The semiconductor device may also include all devices that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics.
- In addition, a display device means a device having display elements (e.g., liquid crystal elements or light-emitting elements). Note that the display device may also include a display panel itself where a plurality of pixels including display elements such as liquid crystal elements or EL elements are formed over the same substrate as a peripheral driver circuit for driving the pixels. In addition, the display device may include a peripheral driver circuit disposed over the substrate by wire bonding or bump bonding, namely, chip-on-glass (COG). Further, the display device may include a flexible printed circuit (FPC) or a printed wiring board (PWB) attached to the display panel (e.g., an IC, a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, or a transistor). Such a display device may also include an optical sheet such as a polarizing plate or a retardation plate. Further, the display device may include a backlight unit (which may include a light conducting plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, and a light source (e.g., an LED or a cold cathode tube)). In addition, a light-emitting device means a display device having self-luminous display elements, particularly, such as EL elements or elements used for an FED. A liquid crystal display device means a display device having liquid crystal elements.
- A display element, a display device, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device may include various types of modes and various elements. For example, as the display element, the display device, the light-emitting element, and the light-emitting device, there is a display medium whose contrast changes by an electromagnetic action, such as an EL element (e.g., an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element, or an EL element containing both organic and inorganic materials); an electron-emissive element; a liquid crystal element; electronic ink; a grating light valve (GLV); a plasma display (PDP); a digital micromirror device (DMD); a piezoelectric ceramic element; or a carbon nanotube. In addition, a display device using an EL element includes an EL display; a display device using an electron-emissive element includes a field emission display (FED), an SED-type flat panel display (SED: Surface-conduction Electron-emitter Display), or the like; a display device using a liquid crystal element includes a liquid crystal display, a transmissive liquid crystal display, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, and a reflective liquid crystal display; and a display device using electronic ink includes electronic paper.
- In this specification, an expression that an object is "formed on" or "formed above" another object does not necessarily mean that the object is in direct contact with another object. The expression may include a case where two objects are not in direct contact with each other, that is, a case where another object is sandwiched therebetween. Accordingly, when it is described that a layer B is formed on (above) a layer A, it means either a case where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A, or a case where another layer (e.g., a layer C or a layer D) is formed in direct contact with the layer A, and then the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer C or D. In addition, when it is described that an object is formed over another object, it does not necessarily mean that the object is in direct contact with another object, and another object may be sandwiched therebetween. Accordingly, for example, when it is described that a layer B is formed over or above a layer A, it means either a case where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A, or a case where another layer (e.g., a layer C or a layer D) is formed in direct contact with the layer A, and then the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer C or D. Similarly, when it is described that an object is formed below or under another object, it means either a case where the objects are in direct contact with each other or a case where the objects are not in contact with each other.
- The invention can provide a display device having an improved color reproduction area on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram in a display device using light-emitting elements. In other words, the invention can provide a display device which can express bright colors.
- In the accompanying drawings,
-
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of picture elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram of picture elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram of a pixel of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 5 is a timing chart of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 6A and 6B are cross-sectional views showing light-emitting elements of a display device of the invention; -
FIGS. 7A to 7C are cross-sectional views of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 8 is a diagram of emission spectrums of light-emitting elements; -
FIG. 9 is a diagram of emission spectrums of light-emitting elements; -
FIG. 10 is a diagram of emission spectrums of light-emitting elements; -
FIG 11 is a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram of light-emitting elements in the invention; -
FIGS. 12A and 12B are cross-sectional views of light-emitting elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 13 is a diagram of emission spectrums of light-emitting elements; -
FIGS. 14A and 14B are cross-sectional views of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 15A to 15C are cross-sectional views of a display device in the invention; -
FIG 16 is a schematic diagram of picture elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of picture elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIG 18 is a schematic diagram of picture elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 19A and 19B are schematic diagrams of picture elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 20 is a circuit diagram of pixels of a display device in the invention; -
FIG 21 is a timing chart of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 22A and 22B are timing charts of a display in the invention; -
FIG 23 is a circuit diagram of a pixel of a display device in the invention; -
FIG 24 is a circuit diagram of a pixel of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an operation of a transistor of a display device in the invention; -
FIG 26 is a circuit diagram of picture elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 27 is a top view of pixels of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 28 is a circuit diagram of picture elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIG 29 is a circuit diagram of picture elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 30A and 30B are views of one mode of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 31A and 31B are views of one mode of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 32A and 32B are views of one mode of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 33 is a view of an electronic device to which a display device of the invention can be applied; -
FIG. 34 is a view of an electronic device to which a display device of the invention can be applied; -
FIGS. 35A and 35B are views of electronic devices to which a display device of the invention can be applied; -
FIGS. 36A and 36B are views of electronic devices to which a display device of the invention applied; -
FIG. 37 is a view of an electronic device to which a display device of the invention applied; -
FIGS. 38A to 38H are views of electronic devices to which a display device of the invention can be applied; -
FIG. 39 is a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram for illustrating a conventional display device; -
FIGS. 40A and 40B are cross-sectional views of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS 41A and 41B are cross-sectional views of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 42A and 42B are cross-sectional views of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 43A and 43B are cross-sectional views of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 44A to 44C are circuit diagrams of pixels of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 45A to 45C are cross-sectional views of light-emitting elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 47A is a top view of a display device, andFIGS. 47B and 47C are cross-sectional views thereof; -
FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 49A and 49B are cross-sectional views of a display device in the invention; -
FIG. 50 is a schematic view of a display device in the invention; -
FIG 51 is a cross-sectional view of a display device in the invention; -
FIG 52 is a circuit diagram of pixels of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 53A and 53B are schematic diagrams of picture elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 54A and 54B are cross-sectional views of light-emitting elements of a display device in the invention; -
FIGS. 55A and 55B are views showing application examples of an electronic device in the invention; -
FIG 56 is a view showing an application example of an electronic device in the invention; -
FIGS. 57A and 57B are views showing application examples of an electronic device in the invention; -
FIG. 58 is a view showing an application example of an electronic device in the invention; -
FIG. 59 is a view showing an application example of an electronic device in the invention; and -
FIG 60 is a view showing an application example of an electronic device in the invention. - Although the invention will be fully described by embodiment modes and embodiments with reference to the drawings, it is to be understood that various changes and modifications will be apparent to those skilled in the art. Unless such changes and modifications depart from the scope of the invention, they should be construed as being included therein. Therefore, the invention is not limited to the following description. Note that the same portions or portions having the same function are denoted by the same reference numerals, and repetitive description is omitted.
- A configuration example of a display device in the invention is shown by a block diagram in
FIG 1 .Reference numeral 100 denotes a pixel portion where a plurality ofpixels 101 are arranged in matrix, and such a configuration is called an active matrix arrangement. In addition,reference numeral 102 denotes a signal line driver circuit and 103 denotes a scan line driver circuit. - Note that the signal
line driver circuit 102 and the scanline driver circuit 103 are formed over the same substrate as apixel portion 100 inFIG. 1 ; however, the configuration of the invention is not limited to this. The signalline driver circuit 102 and the scanline driver circuit 103 may be formed over a different substrate from thepixel portion 100, and connected to thepixel portion 100 with a connector such as a flexible printed circuit (FPC). As a method for mounting the FPC, a connecting method using an anisotropic conductive material or a metal bump, or a wire bonding method can be employed. In addition, each of the signalline driver circuit 102 and the scanline driver circuit 103 is provided one by one inFIG. 1 ; however, the configuration of the invention is not limited to this. The number of the signalline driver circuit 102 and the scanline driver circuit 103 can be set arbitrarily by a designer. - Note also that a pixel means an element having a color element forming one image, and includes a light-emitting element and an element which drives the light-emitting element (e.g., a circuit constructed from transistors) in this specification. In addition, a picture element means an element having pixels each having a color element for displaying one minimum image. Accordingly, in the case of a full color display device having color elements of R (Red), G (Green), and B (Blue), a picture element includes pixels including color elements of R, G, and B. Further, with regard to a picture element which includes a plurality of pixels, pixels are called in such order that a first pixel and a second pixel. In addition, each pixel may have a different area dimension.
- In this specification, a connection means an electrical connection unless otherwise specified. On the other hand, a separation means a state where objects are not connected and electrically separated.
- In addition, in
FIG. 1 , signal lines S1 to Sn, power supply lines V1 to Vn, and scan lines G1 to Gm are provided in thepixel portion 100. Note that the number of the signal lines and the scan lines is not necessarily the same. Further, thepixel portion 100 is not necessarily required to include all of the wires, and another wire may be provided therein in addition to these wires. - The signal
line driver circuit 102 may be any kind of circuits as long as it can supply an input signal to each of the signal lines S1 to Sn. In this embodiment mode, as a specific example, the signalline driver circuit 102 includes ashift register 102a, afirst latch circuit 102b, and asecond latch circuit 102c. Note that the signalline driver circuit 102 of a display device in the invention is not limited to the aforementioned configuration. In addition, the signalline driver circuit 102 may be a signal line driver circuit which can process a video signal in a digital form (also called a digital video signal or a video signal), or a signal line driver circuit which outputs a video signal in an analog form (an analog video signal) by using a D/A (Digital-Analog) converter circuit. Further, the signalline driver circuit 102 may have a configuration including a level shifter circuit, a buffer circuit, or the like depending on the configurations of the display device. - The scan
line driver circuit 103 may be any kind of circuit as long as it can output a signal to each of the scan lines G1 to Gm in order to select a pixel in thepixel portion 100. Specifically, the scanline driver circuit 103 includes a shift register circuit in this embodiment mode. In addition, the scanline driver circuit 103 may have a configuration including a level shifter circuit, a buffer circuit, or the like depending on the configurations of the display device. Further, the scanline driver circuit 103 may be constructed with a shift register and a sampling switch without using a latch circuit. - In addition, a clock signal (S_CLK), a clock inverted signal (S_CLKB), a start pulse (S_SP), a digital video signal (Digital Video Data), a latch signal (Latch Signal), and the like are input to the signal
line driver circuit 102. Then, in accordance with the signals, a video signal corresponding to pixels of each column is output to each of the signal lines S1 to Sn. Note that an analog video signal may be input to the signalline driver circuit 102. - Meanwhile, a clock signal (S_CLK), a clock inverted signal (S_CLKB), a start pulse (S_SP), and the like are input to the scan
line driver circuit 103. Then, in accordance with the signals, a signal which selects pixels is output to a scan line Gi (one of the first scan lines G1 to Gm) of pixel columns which are selected. - Accordingly, the video signal input to the signal lines S1 to Sn is written to each column of the
pixels 101 in a row selected by the signal which is input to the scan line Gi (one of the first scan lines G1 to Gm) from the scanline driver circuit 103. Then, each pixel column is selected by each of the scan lines G1 to Gm and a video signal corresponding to each pixel is written to each pixel. Then, each pixel holds the video signal that has been written for a certain period. By holding the video signal for a certain period, each pixel can maintain a state of lighting or the like. - The display device using light-emitting elements shown in
FIG. 1 is described based on an active matrix driving method; however, the invention is not limited to this. A simple (passive) matrix method may also be employed in the invention. The display device using the active matrix method shown inFIG. 1 includes a control circuit having a thin film transistor for switching in each pixel, and states of lighting and non-lighting of each pixel are controlled by the control circuit in each pixel. On the other hand, a display device using the simple (passive) matrix method is arranged such that a plurality of column signal lines and a plurality of row signal lines are crossed with each other, and light-emitting elements are sandwiched at the crossed portion. Thus, when a potential difference is generated in a region which is sandwiched between a selected row signal line and a column signal line which conducts the output operation, the light-emitting element emits light with a current flowing thereto. - A configuration of a display device using the passive matrix method is shown in
FIG 46 . The display device shown inFIG 46 includes a column signalline driver circuit 4601, a row signalline driver circuit 4602, and apixel portion 4603. Thepixel portion 4603 is provided with column signal lines S1 to Sn and row signal lines V1 to Vn, and has a plurality of light-emittingelements 4604 between the column signals S1 to Sn and the row signals V1 to Vn. In the case of employing the passive matrix method, the configurations of the invention can be simplified compared with the case of employing the active matrix method, and thus, it is preferable. - The aforementioned configurations of the display device can be employed in the invention.
- A specific configuration of the pixel portion in the invention shown in
FIG. 1 is shown inFIG. 2 . InFIG 2 , each of afirst pixel 201, asecond pixel 202, athird pixel 203, afourth pixel 204, afifth pixel 205, and asixth pixel 206 corresponds to thepixel 101 inFIG. 1 . In addition, apicture element 200 which displays one minimum image is formed by combining thefirst pixel 201 to thesixth pixel 206. Each of thefirst pixel 201, thesecond pixel 202, thethird pixel 203, thefourth pixel 204, thefifth pixel 205, and thesixth pixel 206 has a light-emitting element. A light-emitting element R1, a light-emitting element R2, a light-emitting element G1, a light-emitting element G2, a light-emitting element B1, and a light-emitting element B2 are connected to thefirst pixel 201, thesecond pixel 202, thethird pixel 203, thefourth pixel 204, thefifth pixel 205, and thesixth pixel 206, respectively. - In this specification, the light-emitting element R1 of the
first pixel 201 and the light-emitting element R2 of thesecond pixel 202 have chromaticity whose x-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more. In addition, the light-emitting element G1 of thethird pixel 203 and the light-emitting element G2 of thefourth pixel 204 have chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more. Further, the light-emitting element B1 of thefifth pixel 205 and the light-emitting element B2 of thesixth pixel 206 have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.35 or less, respectively. More preferably, either one of the light-emitting element R1 of thefirst pixel 201 or the light-emitting element R2 of thesecond pixel 202 has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.60 or more and 0.35 or less, respectively. In addition, more preferably, either one of the light-emitting element G1 of thethird pixel 203 or the light-emitting element G2 of thefourth pixel 204 has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.30 or less and 0.60 or more, respectively. In addition, more preferably, either one of the light-emitting element B1 of thefifth pixel 205 or the light-emitting element B2 of thesixth pixel 206 has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.15 or less and 0.20 or less, respectively. - Note that in the invention, the absolute value G12 which represents the difference between the coordinates (the distance between the coordinates of x and y) of the light-emitting element G1 and the light-emitting element G2 in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is preferably larger than the absolute value R12 which represents the difference between the coordinates of the light-emitting element R1 and the light-emitting element R2 in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram, or the absolute value B12 which represents the difference between the coordinates of the light-emitting element B1 and the light-emitting element B2 in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram. By satisfying G12 > R12 or G12 > B12, the color reproduction area can be improved to expand a color gamut which can be viewed by human eyes, and thus, it is preferable.
- Note also that a region in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram in this specification corresponds to a region showing visible light which can be recognized by human eyes. That is, a region in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram in this specification corresponds to an inner region surrounded by a thick line in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram shown in
FIG. 39 . - In addition, the circuit configuration of the
picture element 200 in the invention shown inFIG. 2 is shown inFIG 3 . Each of thefirst pixel 201, thesecond pixel 202, thethird pixel 203, thefourth pixel 204, thefifth pixel 205, and thesixth pixel 206 shown inFIG. 2 includes a signal line Si (one of the signal lines S1 to Sn), a scan line Gi (one of the scan lines G1 to Gm), and a power supply line Vi (one of the power supply lines V1 to Vn). In addition, each of thefirst pixel 201, thesecond pixel 202, thethird pixel 203, thefourth pixel 204, thefifth pixel 205, and thesixth pixel 206 includes afirst transistor 301 for switching to control an input of a video signal, asecond transistor 302 for driving to decide the state of lighting or non-lighting of a light-emitting element by the video signal, a light-emittingelement 303, and astorage capacitor 304. Thestorage capacitor 304 is provided so as to hold a gate-source voltage (gate voltage) of thesecond transistor 302 more accurately; however, it is not necessarily required. Note that in this specification, voltage means a potential difference from a ground unless otherwise specified. In addition, the light-emittingelement 303 corresponds to the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2 inFIG. 2 , and each light-emitting element is connected to a circuit which drives the light-emitting element. In the configuration shown inFIG. 3 , the power supply line can be shared to supply currents to the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, or the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 by using the same power supply line Vi. Since the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 have almost the same tone of color, respectively, the light-emitting elements can share the power supply line in this manner. As a result, the number of power supply lines disposed in the display device can be reduced, which is preferable. InFIG. 3 , power supply lines which are connected to the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2, respectively, are described as different wires; however, the power supply lines may be wires diverged from the same wire. - A configuration different from the configuration shown in
FIG. 3 is shown inFIG. 52 . InFIG. 52 , a configuration having the same function as that ofFIG. 3 is denoted by the same reference numeral. As shown inFIG. 52 , a configuration where the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 are connected to different second power supply lines Vi2, respectively may be employed. By using the different power supply lines for supplying currents to the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2, a voltage which is applied to the respective light-emitting elements can be controlled; thereby the luminance of each light-emitting element can be controlled freely, and thus, it is preferable. - Here, a driving method of the light-emitting
element 303 for obtaining light emission inFIG. 3 is described with reference toFIG. 4 . InFIG. 4 , a circuit connected to a light-emittingelement 404 includes afirst transistor 401 for switching to control an input of a video signal, asecond transistor 402 for driving to decide the light intensity of the light-emittingelement 404 by the video signal, asignal line 405, apower supply line 406, and ascan line 407. A gate of thefirst transistor 401 is connected to thescan line 407. One of either a first terminal or a second terminal (a source or a drain) of thefirst transistor 401 is connected to thesignal line 405 and the other is connected to a gate of thesecond transistor 402. One of either a first terminal or a second terminal of thesecond transistor 402 is connected to thepower supply line 406 and the other is connected to a pixel electrode of the light-emittingelement 404. The light-emittingelement 404 includes an anode and a cathode, and in this specification, in the case where the anode is used as the pixel electrode, the cathode is called the opposite electrode; while in the case where the cathode is used as the pixel electrode, the anode is called the opposite electrode. Voltage of the opposite electrode is often kept at a constant level. In addition, thefirst transistor 401 and thesecond transistor 402 may be either an n-channel transistor or a p-channel transistor. In the case where the anode is used as the pixel electrode and the cathode is used as the opposite electrode, thesecond transistor 402 is preferably a p-channel transistor. On the other hand, in the case where the anode is used as the opposite electrode and the cathode is used as the pixel electrode, thesecond transistor 402 is preferably an n-channel transistor. - One of two electrodes of the
storage capacitor 403 is connected to the gate of thesecond transistor 402. In addition, the other of the two electrodes of thestorage capacitor 403 is connected to thepower source line 406; however, the invention is not limited to this, and the other of the two electrodes of thestorage capacitor 403 may be connected to another wire. Thestorage capacitor 403 is provided so as to hold a gate-source voltage (gate voltage) of thesecond transistor 402 more accurately; however, it is not necessarily required by substituting the gate capacitance of thesecond transistor 402. - In
FIG 4 , when thescan line 407 is selected in a period of writing, thefirst transistor 401 whose gate is connected to thescan line 407 is turned on. Then, the light-emittingelement 404 emits light since a current flows from thepower supply line 406 to the light-emittingelement 404 in accordance with a video signal input to the gate of thesecond transistor 402 from thesignal line 405 through thefirst transistor 401. - Note that the pixel configuration is not limited to this. Various types of pixel configurations can be applied such as a method for compensating variations of the threshold voltage of transistors and a method for inputting a signal current to the pixel.
- The aforementioned pixel configurations can be employed in the invention.
- Timing of an operation at the time of displaying an image with the circuit configuration shown in
FIG. 4 is described with reference toFIG. 5 . The display device conducts rewriting and displaying of images repeatedly in a displaying period. The number of rewriting of images is generally set about 60 times per second so that a viewer does not perceive a flicker. Here, a period in which a series operation of rewriting and displaying images is conducted once, that is, a period shown by 501 inFIG. 5 is described as oneframe period 501. In this embodiment mode, a case where a 3-bit digital video signal is used in a digital time gray scale method is given as an example. In the case of a digital time gray scale method, the oneframe period 501 is further divided into a plurality of sub frame periods. Here, since a video signal has 3 bits, the oneframe period 501 is divided into three sub frame periods, and writing and displaying images for each luminous color are conducted in each period. - Each sub frame period includes an address (writing) period Ta# (# is a natural number) and a sustain (light-emitting) period Ts#. In
FIG 5 , the length of the sustain (light-emitting) periods is Ts1 : Ts2 : Ts3 = 4 : 2 : 1, and 23 = 8 gray scales are expressed by controlling the state of lighting or non-lighting of a light-emitting element in each sustain (light-emitting) period. That is, each sustain (light-emitting) period is set to have a power-of-two length such that Ts1 : Ts2 : Ts3 = 2(n-1) : 2(n-2) : ... : 21: 20. For example, in the case where a light-emitting element emits light only in Ts3, and a light-emitting element does not emit light in Ts1 and Ts2, light emission is obtained only in about 14% of all of the sustain (light-emitting) periods. That is, luminance of about 14% can be expressed. In the case where a light-emitting element emits light in Ts1 and Ts2, and a light-emitting element does not emit light in Ts3, light emission is obtained in about 86% of all of the sustain (light-emitting) periods. That is, luminance of about 86% can be expressed. - Each of the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2 which corresponds to the light-emitting
element 303 inFIG. 3 is driven by this operation. In this manner, light-emitting periods of light-emitting elements which are provided in the respective pixels in thepicture element 200 inFIG. 3 are controlled independently by circuits connected to the respective light-emitting elements, and thus, a desired display color can be obtained. Here, a display color means a color which can be visually recognized as a mixed color where luminescences obtained from a plurality of light-emitting elements each having a different luminous color in one pixel are mixed. - Note that the driving method is not limited to this. When an analog signal is input to the gate of the first transistor, luminance of the light-emitting
element 404 may be changed in an analog manner in response to the analog signal. - The aforementioned method of operation can be employed in the invention.
- Next, examples of light-emitting elements which can be applied to the display device of the invention are shown in
FIGS. 6A and 6B . - A light-emitting element shown in
FIG. 6A has an element structure where asubstrate 601, ananode 602, a hole injectlayer 603 which is made of a hole inject material, ahole transport layer 604 which is made of a hole transport material, a light-emittinglayer 605, anelectron transport layer 606 which is made of an electron transport material, an electron injectlayer 607 which is made of an electron inject material, and acathode 608 are stacked in this order. Here, the light-emittinglayer 605 may be formed of only one kind of a light-emitting material or may be formed of two or more kinds of light-emitting materials. In addition, the structure of the light-emitting element in the invention is not limited to this. Needless to say, a circuit or a wire for driving a light-emitting element which is constructed with a transistor may be provided between thesubstrate 601 and theanode 602. - Further, in addition to the stacked structure shown in
FIG. 6A where each functional layer is stacked, there are wide variations of element structures such as an element using a high molecular compound, and a high efficiency element which utilizes, as a light-emitting layer, a triplet light-emitting material which emits light in returning from a triplet excitation state. The light-emitting element can also be applied to a white light-emitting element which can be obtained by controlling a recombination region of carries using a hole blocking layer and dividing a light-emitting region into two regions. - The element of the invention shown in
FIG. 6A can be manufactured as follows. First, a hole inject material, a hole transport material, and a light-emitting material are sequentially deposited over thesubstrate 601 having the anode 602 (ITO: Indium Tin Oxide). Next, an electron transport material and an electron inject material are deposited, and finally thecathode 608 is formed by vapor-deposition. - Note that a hole generation layer may be provided instead of the hole inject layer. The hole generation layer means layer which generates a hole, and can be formed by mixing at least one material selected from the hole transport materials and a material showing an electron-accepting property to the hole transport materials. Here, as a hole transport material, a material similar to a material which can be used for forming the hole transport material can be employed. In addition, as a material showing an electron-accepting property, metal oxide such as a molybdenum oxide, a vanadium oxide, a ruthenium oxide, or a rhenium oxide can be employed.
- Next, materials suitable for the hole inject material, the hole transport material, the electron transport material, the electron inject material, and the light-emitting material are described.
- As the hole inject material, a phthalocyanine-based compound such as phthalocyanine (abbreviation: H2Pc) or copper phthalocyanine (abbreviation: CuPc), a polymer such as a poly(polyethylene dioxythiophene)/poly(polystylene sulfonate) solution (abbreviation: PEDOT/PSS), or the like can be given. The hole inject layer can be formed by selecting a material with a hole transport property which has a relatively lower ionization potential than an ionization potential of a functional layer which is formed to be in contact with the opposite side of an electrode functioning as an anode.
- As a material which is most widely used as the hole transport material, 4,4'-bis[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: NPB), 4,4'-bis[N-(3-methylphenyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: TPD), 4,4',4"-tris(N,N-diphenylamino)triphenylamine (abbreviation: TDATA), 4,4',4"-tris[N-(3-methylphenyl)-N-phenylamino]triphenylamine (abbreviation: MTDATA), 4,4'-bis{N-[4-(N,N-di-m-tolylamino)phenyl]-N-phenylamino}biphenyl (abbreviation: DNTPD), 1,3,5-tris[N,N-di(m-tolyl)amino]benzene (abbreviation: m-MTDAB), 4,4',4"-tris(N-bazolyl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: TCTA), phthalocyanine (abbreviation: H2Pc), copper phthalocyanine (abbreviation: CuPc), vanadyl phthalocyanine (abbreviation: VOPc), or the like is given as an example. Alternatively, the hole transport layer may be a layer with a multilayer structure which is formed by combining two or more layers made of the aforementioned materials.
- As an electron transport material, in addition to tris(8-quinolinolato) aluminum (abbreviation: Alq3), tris(4-methyl-8-quinolinolato)aluminum (abbreviation: Almq3), bis(10-hydroxybenzo[h]-quinolinato)beryllium (abbreviation: BeBq2), bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)(4-phenylphenolato)aluminum (abbreviation: BAlq), bis[2-(2'-hydroxypheyl)benzoxazolato]zinc (abbreviation: Zn(BOX)2), bis[2-(2'-hydroxypheyl)benzothiazolato]zinc (abbreviation: Zn(BTZ)2), or the like, 2-(4-biphenylyl)-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazole (abbreviation: PBD), 1,3-bis [5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]benzene (abbreviation: OXD-7), 3-(4 -biphenylyl)-4-phenyl-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,2,4-triazole (abbreviation: TAZ), 3-(4-biphenylyl)-4-(4-ethylphenyl)-5-(4-tert-butylphenyl)-1,2,4-triazole (abbreviation: p-EtTAZ), bathophenanthroline (abbreviation: BPhen), bathocuproin (abbreviation: BCP), 2,2',2"-(1,3,5-benzenetriyl)-tris(1-phenyl-1H-benzimidazole) (abbreviation: TPBI), 4,4-bis(5-methylbenzoxazol-2-yl)stilbene (abbreviation: BzOs), or the like is given as an example. Alternatively, the electron transport layer may be a layer with a multilayer structure which is formed by combining two or more layers made of the aforementioned materials.
- As an electron inject layer, an inorganic material such as alkaline metal, alkaline earth metal, alkaline metal fluoride, alkaline earth metal fluoride, alkaline metal oxide, or alkaline earth metal oxide is given as an example. In addition to the inorganic material, a material which can be used for forming the electron transport layer such as BPhen, BCP, p-EtTAZ, TAZ, or BzOs can be employed as the material for forming the electron inject layer by selecting from the aforementioned materials a material having a higher electron affinity than the material which is used for forming the electron transport layer. That is, the electron inject layer can also be formed by selecting from materials having electron transport properties a material having relatively a higher electron affinity in the electron inject layer than the electron affinity in the electron transport layer.
- As a light-emitting layer including a light-emitting material, a material which has excellent luminous efficiency and can emit light with a desired emission wavelength may be selected to be employed without limiting to a certain light-emitting material. For example, in order to obtain red light emission, a material which presents light emission having an emission spectrum with a peak of 600 to 680 nm such as 4-dicyanomethylene-2-isopropyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-9-julolidyl)ethenyl]-4H-pyra n (abbreviation: DCJTI), 4-dicyanomethylene-2-methyl-6-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyljulolidyl-9-enyl)-4H-pyran (abbreviation: DCJT), 4-dicyanomethylene-2-tert-butyl-6-[2-(1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-9-julolidyl)ethenyl]-4H-pyra n (abbreviation: DCJTB), periflanthene, or 2,5-dicyano-1,4-bis(2-[10-methoxy-1,1,7,7-tetramethyl-9-julolidyl]ethenyl)benzene can be employed. In addition, in order to obtain green-based light emission, a material which presents light emission having an emission spectrum with a peak of 500 to 550 nm such as N,N"-dimethylquinacridone (abbreviation: DMQd), Coumarin 6, Coumarin 545T, or tris(8-quinolinolato) aluminum (abbreviation: Alq3) can be employed. Further, in order to obtain blue light emission, a material which presents light emission having an emission spectrum with a peak of 420 to 500 nm such as 2-tert-butyl-9,10-di(2-naphthyl)anthracene (abbreviation: t-BuDNA), 9,10-diphenylanthracene (abbreviation: DPA), 9,10-di(2-naphthyl) anthracene (abbreviation: DNA), bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)-4-phenylphenolato-gallium (abbreviation: BGaq), or bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolato)(4-phenylphenolato)aluminum (abbreviation: BAlq) can be employed. In addition to the aforementioned materials which emit fluorescence, materials which emit phosphorescence such as tris(2-phenylpyridine)iridium may also be employed.
- A material used for making the light-emitting material into the dispersion state (also called a host material) is not limited to a certain material. In addition to a compound having an arylamine skeleton such as 4,4'-bis[N-(1-naphthyl)-N-phenylamino]biphenyl (abbreviation: α-NPD), a carbazole derivative such as 4,4'-bis(N-carbazolyl)biphenyl (abbreviation: CBP) or 4,4',4"-tri(N-carbazolyl)triphenylamine (abbreviation: TCTA), a metal complex such as bis[2-(2-hydroxyphenyl)pyridinato]zinc (abbreviation: Znpp2), bis[2-(2'-hydroxypheyl)benzoxazolato]zinc (abbreviation: Zn(BOX)2), or tris(8-quinolinolato) aluminum (abbreviation: Alq3), or the like can be employed.
- In addition, as shown in
FIG. 6B , a light-emitting element formed by stacking layers in reverse order fromFIG. 6A can be employed. That is, the light-emitting element shown inFIG 6B has an element structure where asubstrate 601, acathode 608, an electron injectlayer 607 which is made of an electron inject material, anelectron transport layer 606 which is made of an electron transport material, a light-emittinglayer 605, ahole transport layer 604 which is made of a hole transport material, a hole injectlayer 603 which is made of a hole inject material, and ananode 602 are stacked in this order. - In order to extract light emission from the light-emitting element, at least one of the anode and the cathode of the light-emitting elements is required to be transparent. A TFT and the light-emitting element are formed over a substrate; and there are light-emitting elements having a top emission structure where light emission is extracted through a surface on the side opposite to the substrate, having a bottom emission structure where light emission is extracted through a surface on the substrate side, and a dual emission structure where light emission is extracted through both the surface on the side opposite to the substrate and the surface on the substrate side. The pixel configuration of the invention can be applied to the light-emitting elements having any emission structure.
- By combining materials having the respective functions as described above, the light-emitting elements of the invention can be manufactured.
- Next, examples of a top emission structure, a bottom emission structure, and a dual emission structure of light-emitting elements which can be applied to the display device of the invention are shown
FIGS. 7A to 7C . - A light-emitting element with the top emission structure is shown in
FIG. 7A . - In the light-emitting element with the top emission structure, a driving
TFT 701 is formed over asubstrate 700, afirst electrode 702 is formed to be connected to a source electrode of the drivingTFT 701, and a light-emittinglayer 703 and asecond electrode 704 are formed over thefirst electrode 702. - In addition, the
first electrode 702 is an anode of the light-emitting element while thesecond electrode 704 is a cathode of the light-emitting element. That is, the portion where the light-emittinglayer 703 is sandwiched between thefirst electrode 702 and thesecond electrode 704 corresponds to the light-emitting element. - Further, as a material used for the
first electrode 702 functioning as the anode, a material having a high work function is preferably employed. For example, in addition to a single layer of a titanium nitride film, a chromium film, a tungsten film, a Zn film, a Pt film, or the like, stacked layers of a titanium nitride film and a film containing aluminum as a main component, a three-layer structure of a titanium nitride film, a film containing aluminum as a main component, and a titanium nitride film can be employed. Note that with a stacked structure, resistance as a wire is low, an excellent ohmic contact can be obtained, and a function as an anode can also be obtained. By using a metal film which reflects light, an anode which does not transmit light can be obtained. - Furthermore, as a material used for the
second electrode 704 functioning as the cathode, stacked layers of a thin metal film formed of a material having a low work function (Al, Ag, Li, Ca, or an alloy of these such as MgAg, MgIn, AlLi, CaF2, or calcium nitride) and a transparent conductive film (of ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), indium zinc oxide (IZO), zinc oxide (ZnO), or the like) is preferably employed. By using a thin metal film and a transparent conductive film having transparency in this manner, a cathode which can transmit light can be formed. - In this manner, light emitted from the light-emitting element can be extracted to the top surface as shown by an arrow in
FIG. 7A . - In addition, the light-emitting element with the bottom emission structure is shown in
FIG. 7B . Since the light-emitting element of the bottom emission structure is the same as the light-emitting element with the structure inFIG 7A other than the emission structure, description is made with the same numerals as those inFIG 7A . - Here, as a material used for the
first electrode 702 functioning as the anode, a material having a high work function is desirably employed. For example, a transparent conductive film such as an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) film or an indium zinc oxide (IZO) film can be employed. By using a transparent conductive film having transparency in this manner, an anode which can transmit light can be formed. - Further, as a material used for the
second electrode 704 functioning as the cathode, a metal film formed of a material having a low work function (Al, Ag, Li, Ca, or an alloy of these such as MgAg, MgIn, AlLi, CaF2, or calcium nitride) can be used. By using a metal film which reflects light in this manner, a cathode which does not transmit light can be obtained. - In this manner, light emitted from the light-emitting element can be extracted to the bottom surface as shown by an arrow in
FIG. 7B . - The light-emitting element with the dual emission structure is shown in
FIG. 7C . Since the light-emitting element with the dual emission structure is the same as the light-emitting element with the structure inFIG. 7A other than the emission structure, description is made with the same numerals as those inFIG 7A . - Here, as a material used for the
first electrode 702 functioning as the anode, a material having a high work function is desirably employed. For example, a transparent conductive film such as an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) film or an indium zinc oxide (IZO) film can be employed. By using a transparent conductive film having transparency in this manner, an anode which can transmit light can be formed. - In addition, as a material used for the
second electrode 704 functioning as the cathode, stacked layers of a thin metal film formed of a material having a low work function (Al, Ag, Li, Ca, or an alloy of these such as MgAg, MgIn, AlLi, CaF2, or calcium nitride) and a transparent conductive film (of ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), indium oxide zinc oxide alloy (In2O3-ZnO), zinc oxide (ZnO), or the like) is preferably employed. By using a thin metal film and a transparent conductive film having transparency in this manner, a cathode which can transmit light can be formed. - In this manner, light emitted from the light-emitting element can be extracted to both the top and bottom surfaces as shown by arrows in
FIG. 7C . - The aforementioned emission structures can be employed for the display device of the invention.
- Further, in the emission structures shown in
FIGS. 7A to 7C , another emission structure having more interlayer films can also be employed. - In
FIG. 51A , a structure of a light-emitting element with a top emission structure is shown as an example. The structure shown inFIG 51A is different fromFIG. 7A in that a single-layeredinterlayer insulating film 5101 and awire 5102 for being connected to a first electrode are provided. By employing a film having planarity for theinterlayer insulating film 5101, disconnection of wires or the like due to steps of the interlayer film can be preferably reduced, for example, in the first electrode or the like provided over theinterlayer insulating film 5101. - In addition, a structure where a first reflecting
electrode 5103 which is made of the same material as a gate electrode and a second reflectingelectrode 5104 which is made of the same material as source and drain electrodes are provided below the light-emitting element is preferably employed. In the top emission structure, efficiency of light extraction is bad since light emitted below the light-emitting element is not emitted to the viewer's side. However, by employing a structure where the first reflectingelectrode 5103 and the second reflectingelectrode 5104 are provided, more light can be emitted through the top surface of the light-emitting element, and thus, it is preferable. - The aforementioned emission structures can be employed for the display device of the invention.
- Next, a specific example of a light-emitting material used for the light-emitting element which can be applied to the display device of the invention is described.
- Description has been made of the configuration of the pixel portion of the invention where the picture element of the invention includes the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel in
FIG 2 . In addition, a light-emitting element is provided in each of the first pixel to the sixth pixel, such that the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G1, the light-emitting element G2, the light-emitting element B1, and the light-emitting element B2 are connected to the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel, respectively. - In this specification, the light-emitting element R1 of the first pixel and the light-emitting element R2 of the second pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose x-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more. In addition, the light-emitting element G1 of the third pixel and the light-emitting element G2 of the fourth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more. Further, the light-emitting element B1 of the fifth pixel and the light-emitting element B2 of the sixth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.15 or less and 0.20 or less, respectively.
- Note that a structure which satisfies the following conditions is more preferable. Either one of the light-emitting element of the first pixel or the light-emitting element of the second pixel has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.60 or more and 0.35 or less, respectively; either one of the light-emitting element of the third pixel or the light-emitting element of the fourth pixel has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.30 or less and 0.60 or more, respectively; either one of the light-emitting element of the fifth pixel or the light-emitting element of the sixth pixel has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.15 or less and 0.20 or less, respectively. By arranging the respective color coordinates of the light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel and the second pixel; the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel and the fourth pixel; and the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel in different regions of the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram, a display device having a more improved color reproduction area on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram can be obtained.
- Specific examples of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 used for the first pixel and the second pixel of the invention are described.
- A specific element structure of the light-emitting element R1 which is provided in the first pixel is described. First, CuPu having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm; NPB having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a hole transport layer; a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by
co-evaporating 2,3-bis(4-diphenylaminophenyl)quinoxaline (abbreviation: TPAQn) which is a host material and bis[2-(2'-benzothienyl)pyridinato-N,C3']iridium(acetylacetonate) (abbreviation: Ir(btp)2(acac); BAlq having a thickness of 10 nm is formed as an electron transport layer; Alq having a thickness of 20 nm is formed; calcium fluoride having a thickness of 2 nm is formed as an electron inject layer; and Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially. Note that the ratio of TPAQn to Ir(btp)2(acac) in the light-emitting layer is controlled so that Ir(btp)2(acac) has a concentration of 8wt%. - In addition, a specific element structure of the light-emitting element R2 which is provided in the second pixel is described. First, CuPu having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm; NPB having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a hole transport layer; a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating TPAQn which is a host material and rubrene; BAlq having a thickness of 10 nm is formed as an electron transport layer; Alq having a thickness of 20 nm is formed; calcium fluoride having a thickness of 2 nm is formed as an electron inject layer; and Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially. Note that the ratio of TPAQn to rubrene in the light-emitting layer is controlled so that rubrene has a concentration of 10wt%.
-
FIG 8 shows an emission spectrum 801 of the light-emitting element R1 manufactured as above and anemission spectrum 802 of the light-emitting element R2 manufactured as above. The emission spectrums inFIG. 8 correspond to emission spectrums when current is supplied to the light-emitting elements with a current density of 25 mA/cm2. Theemission spectrum 802 of the light-emitting element R2 is located in a position which is shifted to the short-wavelength side of the emission spectrum 801 of the light-emitting element R1 inFIG. 8 . At this time, chromaticity coordinates of the light-emitting element R1 on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are (x, y) = (0.68, 0.32). In addition, chromaticity coordinates of the light-emitting element R2 on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are (x, y) = (0.47, 0.52). - Next, specific examples of the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 used for the third pixel and the fourth pixel of the invention are described.
- A specific element structure of the light-emitting element G1 which is provided in the third pixel is described. DNTPD having a thickness of 50 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm; NPB having a thickness of 10 nm is formed as a hole transport layer; a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 37.5 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating Alq which is a host material and Coumarin 6; Alq having a thickness of 37.5 nm is formed as an electron transport layer; calcium fluoride having a thickness of 2 nm is formed as an electron inject layer; and Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially. Note that the ratio of Alq to Coumarin 6 in the light-emitting layer is controlled so that Coumarin 6 has a concentration of 0.3wt%.
- In addition, a specific element structure of the light-emitting element G2 which is provided in the fourth pixel is described. DNTPD having a thickness of 50 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm; NPB having a thickness of 10 nm is formed as a hole transport layer; a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 37.5 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating Alq which is a host material and DMQd; Alq having a thickness of 37.5 nm is formed as an electron transport layer; calcium fluoride having a thickness of 2 nm is formed as an electron inject layer; and Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially. Note that the ratio of Alq to DMQd in the light-emitting layer is controlled so that DMQd has a concentration of 0.3wt%.
-
FIG 9 shows anemission spectrum 901 of the light-emitting element G1 manufactured as above and anemission spectrum 902 of the light-emitting element G2 manufactured as above. The emission spectrums inFIG 9 correspond to emission spectrums when current supplied to the light-emitting elements with a current density of 25 mA/cm2. Theemission spectrum 902 of the light-emitting element G2 is located in a position shifted to the long-wavelength side of theemission spectrum 901 of the light-emitting element G1 inFIG. 9 . At this time, chromaticity coordinates of the light-emitting element G1 on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are (x, y) = (0.28, 0.63). In addition, chromaticity coordinates of the light-emitting element G2 on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are (x, y) = (0.43, 0.56). - Next, specific examples of the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 used for the fifth pixel and the sixth pixel of the invention are described.
- In addition, a specific element structure of the light-emitting element B1 which is provided in the fifth pixel is described. DNTPD having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm; NPB having a thickness of 30nm is formed as a hole transport layer; t-BuDNA having a thickness of 40 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer; Alq having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as an electron transport layer; calcium fluoride having a thickness of 2 nm is formed as an electron inject layer; and Al having a thickness of 50nm is formed as a cathode sequentially.
- Further, a specific element structure of the light-emitting element B2 which is provided in the sixth pixel is described. DNTPD having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm; NPB having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as a hole transport layer; a co-evaporation layer of 40nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating t-BuDNA and TPAQn; Alq having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as an electron transport layer; calcium fluoride having a thickness of 2 nm is formed as an electron inject layer; and Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially. Note that the ratio of t-BuDNA to TPAQ in the light-emitting layer is controlled so TPAQn has a concentration of 5wt%.
-
FIG. 10 shows anemission spectrum 1001 of the light-emitting element B1 manufactured as above and anemission spectrum 1002 of the light-emitting element B2 manufactured as above. The emission spectrums inFIG 10 correspond to emission spectrums when current is supplied to the light-emitting elements with a current density of 25 mA/cm2. Theemission spectrum 1002 of the light-emitting element B2 is located in a position shifted to the long-wavelength side of theemission spectrum 1001 of the light-emitting element B1 inFIG. 10 . At this time, chromaticity coordinates of the light-emitting element B1 on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are (x, y) = (0.15, 0.11). In addition, chromaticity coordinates of the light-emitting element B2 on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are (x, y) = (0.18, 0.32). -
FIG. 11 shows the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram and a diagram where each color coordinate of the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2 manufactured as above are plotted. InFIG. 11 , a region where color coordinates of the light-emitting elements R1, G1, and B1 are connected corresponds to RGB1, while a region where color coordinates of the light-emitting elements R2, G2, and B2 are connected corresponds to RGB2. By providing different tones of color of RGB which are the trichromaticity of colors, colors with tones in a region surrounded by RGB6 can be expressed, and thus, a display device having an improved color reproduction area on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram can be provided. - Note that in each light-emitting element, when the optical distance between a light-emitting region and a reflecting electrode (an electrode which reflects light) is L and a desired wavelength of light is λ, a so-called micro resonator structure (a micro cavity structure) which satisfies L = (2m-1)λ/4 (note that m is a natural number not less than 1) can be employed in order to increase the color purity.
- Note also that any one of the color coordinates of the light-emitting elements R2, G2, and B2 is only required to be located outside the region where color coordinates of the light-emitting elements R1, G1, and B1 are connected. This is because if all of the light-emitting elements R2, G2, and B2 have color coordinates inside the region where color coordinates of the light-emitting elements R1, G1, and B1 are connected, color reproduction areas of
RGB 1 and RGB2 overlap with each other. - As described above, the display device of the invention can employ the aforementioned materials of the light-emitting elements in each pixel. Note that the aforementioned materials of the light-emitting elements are only illustrative, and therefore, any light-emitting element can be employed as long as it has similar color coordinates to those of the invention.
- Note that this embodiment can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- In this embodiment mode, a different configuration of light-emitting elements from the configuration of the light-emitting elements in the display of the invention in the aforementioned embodiment mode is described.
- Description has been made of the configuration of the pixel portion of the invention with reference to
FIG 2 where the picture element of the invention includes the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel. In addition, a light-emitting element is provided in each of the first pixel to the sixth pixel, so that a light-emitting element R1, a light-emitting element R2, a light-emitting element G1, a light-emitting element G2, a light-emitting element B1, and a light-emitting element B2 are connected to the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel, respectively. - In this specification, the light-emitting element R1 in the first pixel and the light-emitting element R2 in the second pixel of the invention in this specification have chromaticity whose x-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more. In addition, the light-emitting element G1 in the third pixel and the light-emitting element G2 in the fourth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more. Further, the light-emitting element B1 in the fifth pixel and the light-emitting element B2 in the sixth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.15 or less and 0.20 or less, respectively.
- In this embodiment mode, the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels are formed to have different emission spectrums from each other; the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels are formed to have different emission spectrums from each other, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels are formed to have different emission spectrums from each other, by varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting elements. Accordingly, the color coordinates on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels, respectively. A specific example is shown below.
- In this embodiment mode, a specific example for varying coordinates of the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram between the light emitting-element G1 and the light-emitting element G2 used for the third pixel and the fourth pixel is described.
- A specific structure of the light-emitting element G1 provided in the third pixel is described. CuPc of having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm; NPB having a thickness of 40 nm is formed as a hole transport layer; a co-evaporation layer of 40 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating Alq which is a host material and Coumarin 6 which is a green light-emitting material; a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 30snm is formed as an electron inject layer, by co-evaporating Alq and Li; and Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially. Note that the ratio of Alq to Coumarin 6 in the light-emitting layer is controlled so that Coumarin 6 has a concentration of 0.3wt%. In addition, the ratio of Alq to Li in the electron inject layer is controlled so that Li has a concentration of 1 wt%.
- A stacked structure of the light-emitting element G1 provided in the third pixel is shown in
FIG 12A . The light-emitting element G1 has an element structure where asubstrate 1211, ananode 1213 formed thereover with atransistor 1212 sandwiched therebetween, a hole injectlayer 1201A which is made of a hole inject material, ahole transport layer 1202A which is made of a hole transport material, a light-emittinglayer 1203A, anelectron transport layer 1204A which is made of an electron transport material, an electron injectlayer 1205A which is made of an electron inject material, and acathode 1214 are stacked in this order. Note that a stacked structure in a right view ofFIG. 12A corresponds to an enlarged cross-sectional view of the light-emitting element portion inFIG. 12A . - A specific structure of the light-emitting element G2 provided in the fourth pixel is described. CuPc having a thickness of 20 nm is formed as a hole inject layer over ITO having a thickness of 110 nm; NPB having a thickness of 40 nm is formed as a hole transport layer, a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 40 nm is formed as a light-emitting layer, by co-evaporating Alq which is a host material and Coumarin 6 which is a green light-emitting material; a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 30 nm is formed as an electron inject layer, by co-evaporating Alq and Li; a co-evaporation layer having a thickness of 180 nm is formed, by co-evaporating NPB and molybdenum oxide (VI); and Al having a thickness of 150 nm is formed as a cathode sequentially. Note that the ratio of Alq to Coumarin 6 in the light-emitting layer is controlled so that Coumarin 6 has a concentration of 0.3wt%. In addition, the ratio of Alq to Li in the electron inject layer is controlled so that Li has a concentration of 1wt%. Note that the ratio of NPB to molybdenum oxide (VI) is controlled so that molybdenum oxide has a concentration of 20wt%.
- A stacked structure of the light-emitting element G2 provided in the fourth pixel is shown in
FIG 12B . The light-emitting element G2 has an element structure where asubstrate 1211, ananode 1213 formed thereover with atransistor 1212 sandwiched therebetween, a hole injectlayer 1201B which is made of a hole inject material, ahole transport layer 1202B which is made of a hole transport material, a light-emittinglayer 1203B, anelectron transport layer 1204B which is made of an electron transport material, the electron injectlayer 1205B which is made of an electron inject material, a co-evaporation layer of NPB and molybdenum oxide (VI) 1206, and acathode 1214 are stacked in this order. Note that a stacked structure in a right view ofFIG. 12B corresponds to an enlarged cross-sectional view of the light-emitting element portion inFIG. 12B . - In addition,
FIG 13 shows anemission spectrum 1301 of the light-emitting element G1 which is stacked as shown inFIG 12A , and anemission spectrum 1302 of the light-emitting element G2 which is stacked as shown inFIG. 12B . The emission spectrums inFIG 13 correspond to emission spectrums when current is supplied to the light-emitting elements with a current density of 25 mA/cm2. Theemission spectrum 1302 of the light-emitting element G2 is located in a position shifted to the short-wavelength side of theemission spectrum 1301 of the light-emitting element G1 inFIG. 13 . At this time, chromaticity coordinates of the light-emitting element G1 on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are (x, y) = (0.30, 0.64). In addition, chromaticity coordinates of the light-emitting element G2 on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are (x, y) = (0.21, 0.69). - Similarly, the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels can be formed to have different emission spectrums from each other; and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels can be formed to have different emission spectrums from each other, by varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting elements. In other words, the color coordinates on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram can be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels.
- Like an example shown in this embodiment mode, the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels can be formed to have different color coordinates from each other on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram as well as the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels can be formed to have different color coordinates from each other on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram, by varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting element. Needless to say, by using different materials for the respective light-emitting elements while at the same time varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting elements, light-emitting elements having different color coordinates from each other on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram may be obtained.
- Furthermore, varying the emission spectrums by varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting elements (thickening) is not limited to be achieved by forming a co-evaporation layer. For example, as shown in
FIGS. 45A to 45C andFIGS. 54A and 54B , varying the emission spectrums by varying the thickness of the respective light-emitting elements may be achieved by thickening any of a hole injectlayer 1201, ahole transport layer 1202, a light-emittinglayer 1203, anelectron transport layer 1204, or an electron injectlayer 1205. For example, as shown inFIG 45A , by thickening the hole injectlayer 1201, the thickness as a whole may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2. Alternatively, as shown inFIG 45B , by thickening thehole transport layer 1202, the thickness as a whole may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2. Further alternatively, as shown inFIG. 45C , by thickening the light-emittinglayer 1203, the thickness as a whole may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2. In addition, as shown inFIG 54A , by thickening theelectron transport layer 1204, the thickness as a whole may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2. Further, as shown inFIG 54B , by thickening the electron injectlayer 1205, the thickness as a whole may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2. Needless to say, by thickening a plurality of films among the hole inject layer, the hole transport layer, the light-emitting layer, the electron transport layer, and the electron inject layer to vary the film thickness, light-emitting elements having different color coordinates from each other on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram may be obtained. - Note that in order to achieve the thickening of the film, a co-evaporation layer including metal oxide is employed in this embodiment mode. By employing metal oxide for the co-evaporation layer, increase in driving voltage due to thickening of the film can be prevented, and thus, it is preferable.
- Note that this embodiment mode in the invention is different from the so-called micro resonator structure (the micro cavity structure) which satisfies L = (2m-1)λ/4 (note that m is a natural number not less than 1) where the optical distance between a light-emitting region and a reflecting electrode (an electrode which reflects light) is L and a desired wavelength of light is λ. Note also that the optical distance is calculated by the following formula: "the actual distance x the refractive index at wavelength λ". The optical distance of the light-emitting element of this embodiment mode in the invention may be designed in any manner as long as the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 have different emission spectrums from each other, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 have different emission spectrums from each other, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 have different emission spectrums from each other. For example, the light-emitting elements may be designed to be thinner in ascending order from the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G1, the light-emitting element G2, the light-emitting element B1, and the light-emitting element B2. Alternatively, the light-emitting elements may also be designed to be thinner in ascending order from the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2.
- Note also that by thickening the films of the light-emitting elements, the distance D between a first electrode (an anode) and a second electrode (a cathode) of the light-emitting element varies between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2, respectively in this embodiment mode. In this specification, the distance D between the first electrode (the anode) and the second electrode (the cathode) of the light-emitting element corresponds to the distance between an end face of the first electrode on the light-emitting layer side and an end face of the second electrode on the light-emitting layer side (a boundary of the first electrode on the hole inject layer, and a boundary of the second electrode on the electron inject layer in this embodiment mode).
- As described above, the display device of the invention can employ the aforementioned materials of the light-emitting elements in each pixel. Note that the aforementioned materials of the light-emitting elements are only illustrative; therefore, any light-emitting element can be employed as long as it has a similar color coordinate to that of the invention.
- Note that this embodiment can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- In this embodiment mode, a different configuration of light-emitting elements from the configuration of the light-emitting elements in the display of the invention in the aforementioned embodiment modes is described.
- Description has been made of the configuration of the pixel portion of the invention where the picture element of the invention includes the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel in
FIG. 2 In addition, a light-emitting element is provided in each of the first pixel to the sixth pixel, such that a light-emitting element R1, a light-emitting element R2, a light-emitting element G1, a light-emitting element G2, a light-emitting element B1, and a light-emitting element B2 are connected to the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel, respectively. - In this specification, the light-emitting element R1 of the first pixel and the light-emitting element R2 of the second pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose x-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more. In addition, the light-emitting element G1 of the third pixel and the light-emitting element G2 of the fourth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more. Further, the light-emitting element B1 of the fifth pixel and the light-emitting element B2 of the sixth pixel of the invention have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.15 or less and 0.20 or less, respectively.
- In this embodiment mode, the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels are formed to have roughly equal emission spectrums to each other, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels are formed to have roughly equal emission spectrums to each other, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels are formed to have roughly equal emission spectrums to each other. By providing a color filter at a portion through which light emitted from each of the light-emitting elements travels, the color coordinates on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels. A specific example is shown below.
- In this embodiment mode, a configuration of a display device is described using a cross-sectional structure of a picture element portion.
-
FIGS. 14A and 14B are partial cross-sectional views of a picture element of the display device in this embodiment mode. The display device of the invention shown inFIG. 14A includes asubstrate 1400, abase insulating film 1401, asemiconductor layer 1402, agate insulating film 1403, agate electrode 1404, aninterlayer insulating film 1405, a connectingportion 1406, afirst electrode 1407 of a light-emitting element, apartition wall 1408, a light-emittinglayer 1409, asecond electrode 1410 of the light-emitting element, a color filter (R1) 1411, a color filter (R2) 1412, a color filter (G1) 1413, a color filter (G2) 1414, a color filter (B1) 1415, a color filter (B2) 1416, and anopposite substrate 1417. - The light emitting-element is formed at a portion where the light-emitting
layer 1409 is sandwiched between thefirst electrode 1407 and thesecond electrode 1410 of the light-emitting element. The light-emitting element is connected to a thin film transistor which is made of thesemiconductor layer 1402, thegate insulating film 1403, and thegate electrode 1404 through the connectingportion 1406 which is electrically in contact with thefirst electrode 1407 of the light-emitting element to be controlled light emission. In addition, this embodiment mode shows a structure where thefirst electrode 1407 is a reflecting electrode formed of a highly reflective material, and thesecond electrode 1410 is a transparent electrode formed of a conductive material having a light transmitting property, so that light is extracted from the direction of thesecond electrode 1410. - Note that the thin film transistors in
FIG 14A drive the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G1, the light-emitting element G2, the light-emitting element B1, and the light-emitting element B2, respectively, in order from left to right. Note that emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements in the case where the color filter are not provided in the respective pixels are roughly equal between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2. Note also that arrows shown inFIG. 14A schematically show the light emitted through the color filters from the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element G1, the light-emitting element B1, the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G2, and the light-emitting element B2, respectively, in order from left to right. - In this embodiment mode, the color filter (R1) 1411, the color filter (R2) 1412, the color filter (G1) 1413, the color filter (G2) 1414, the color filter (B1) 1415, and the color filter (B2) 1416 are provided at light-emission sides of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels, respectively. In this embodiment mode, by varying transmission properties of the color filter (R1) 1411 and the color filter (R2) 1412 from each other, varying transmission properties of the color filter (G1) 1413 and the color filter (G2) 1414 from each other, and varying transmission properties of the color filter (B1) 1415 and the color filter (B2) 1416 from each other to vary emission spectrums of the light emitted from the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 from each other, vary emission spectrums of the light emitted from the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 from each other, and vary emission spectrums of the light emitted from the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 from each other, light-emitting elements each having a different color coordinate on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram can be obtained.
- Note that the color filters may be manufactured by any of a pigment dispersion method, a printing method, an electrodeposition method, and a staining method. The light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels may be light-emitting elements having the same emission spectrum, for example, a light-emitting element having an emission spectrum which emits white light. By providing the light-emitting elements having the same emission spectrum, a process of producing the light-emitting elements can be simplified, and thus, it is preferable.
-
FIG. 14B is a partial cross-sectional view of a picture element of the display device in this embodiment mode. Note that each structure of the display device in the invention shown inFIG. 14B conforms toFIG 14A . - What is different from
FIG. 14A is that light emitted from the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element G1, and the light-emitting element B1 does not travel through the color filters. Emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements in the case where the color filters are not provided in the respective pixels at this time are roughly equal between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2. InFIG. 14B , emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G2, and the light-emitting element B2 are varied by the transmission properties of the color filter (R2) 1412, the color filter (G2) 1414, and the color filter (B2) 1416. Accordingly, by varying the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 from each other, varying emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 from each other, and varying emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 from each other, light-emitting elements each having a different color coordinate on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram can be obtained. - Note that by disposing the same color light-emitting elements over the whole surface, varying emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 from each other, varying emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 from each other, and varying emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 from each other through color filters each having a different transmission property, light-emitting elements each having a different color coordinate on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram may be obtained. For example, white light-emitting elements are disposed as the same color light-emitting elements, and color filters may be disposed above the first pixel to the sixth pixel as shown in
FIG. 14A . - In addition,
FIG. 15A is a view showing a display device of the invention having a different structure fromFIG. 14A . Note that each structure of the display device in the invention shown inFIG. 15A conforms toFIG 14A . InFIG 15A , an example of a bottom emission display device having a structure where the light-emitting element emits light to thefirst electrode 1407 side thereof is shown. InFIG. 15B , thefirst electrode 1407 is formed of a conductive material having a light transmitting property in order to extract light emission from thefirst electrode 1407 side, and thesecond electrode 1410 is formed as a reflecting electrode which is manufactured by using a highly reflective conductive material. - In this embodiment mode, the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels, the color filter (R1) 1411, the color filter (R2) 1412, the color filter (G1) 1413, the color filter (G2) 1414, the color filter (B1) 1415, and the color filter (B2) 1416 are provided, respectively at light-emission sides of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels. In this embodiment mode, by varying transmission properties of the color filter (R1) 1411 and the color filter (R2) 1412 from each other, varying transmission properties of the color filter (G1) 1413 and the color filter (G2) 1414 from each other, and varying transmission properties of the color filter (B1) 1415 and the color filter (B2) 1416 from each other to vary emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 from each other, vary emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 from each other, and vary emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 from each other, light-emitting elements each having a different color coordinate on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram can be obtained.
- Note that the color filters may be manufactured by any of a pigment dispersion method, a printing method, an electrodeposition method, and a staining method. Each of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 provided in the first and second pixels, the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 provided in the third and fourth pixels, and the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 provided in the fifth and sixth pixels may be a light-emitting element including a light-emitting element having the same emission spectrum, for example, a light-emitting element having an emission spectrum which emits white light. By including the light-emitting element having the same emission spectrum, a process of producing the light-emitting element can be simplified, and thus, it is preferable.
-
FIG 15B is a partial cross-sectional view of a picture element of the display device in this embodiment mode. Note that each structure of the display device in the invention shown inFIG. 15B conforms toFIG 15A . - What is different from
FIG 15A is that light emitted from the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element G1, and the light-emitting element B1 does not travel through the color filters. Emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements in the case where the color filters are not provided in the respective pixels at this time are roughly equal between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2. InFIG 15B , emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G2, and the light-emitting element B2 are varied by the transmission properties of the color filter (R2) 1412, the color filter (G2) 1414, and the color filter (B2) 1416. Accordingly, by varying the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 from each other, varying the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 from each other, and varying the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 from each other, light-emitting elements each having a different color coordinate on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram can be obtained. - Note that by disposing the same color light-emitting elements over the whole surface, and providing color filters each having a different transmission property so as to overlap with the light-emitting elements, so that emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 are varied from each other, emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 are varied from each other, and emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting
elements B 1 and B2 are varied from each other through the color filters, light-emitting elements each having a different color coordinate on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram may be obtained. For example, white light-emitting elements are disposed as the same color light-emitting elements, and color filters may be disposed above the first pixel to the sixth pixel as shown inFIG. 15A . -
FIG. 15C is a partial cross-sectional view of a picture element of the display device in this embodiment mode. Note that each structure of the display device in the invention shown inFIG 15C conforms toFIGS. 15A and 15B . - What is different from
FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the color filter (R1) 1411, the color filter (R2) 1412, the color filter (G1) 1413, the color filter (G2) 1414, the color filter (B1) 1415, and the color filter (B2) 1416 are disposed below thefirst electrode 1407 which is disposed between the light-emitting element and a transistor. Thus, the process can be simplified, and thus, it is easy to conduct. Accordingly, by varying the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 from each other, varying the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 from each other, and varying the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 from each other, light-emitting elements each having a different color coordinate on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram can be obtained. - In addition, by varying the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 from each other, varying the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 from each other, and varying the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 from each other, using a method where a short-wavelength monochromatic light-emitting element is disposed and a luminous color thereof is converted into a required color through a color conversion layer, light-emitting elements each having a different color coordinate on the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram may be obtained. The display device of the invention shown in
FIG. 40A includes asubstrate 4000, abase insulating film 4001, asemiconductor layer 4002, agate insulating film 4003, agate electrode 4004, aninterlayer insulating film 4005, a connectingportion 4006, afirst electrode 4007 of a light-emitting element, apartition wall 4008, light-emittinglayers second electrode 4010 of the light-emitting element, a color conversion layer (R1) 4011, a color conversion layer (G1) 4012, a color conversion layer (R2) 4013, a color conversion layer (G2) 4014, and anopposite substrate 4015. - For example, blue light-emitting elements B1 and B2 each having a different emission spectrum are disposed as the light-emitting
layers FIG. 40A , the color conversion layers may be disposed above the first pixel, the second pixel, the fourth pixel, and the fifth pixel. Alternatively, in the case of a bottom emission structure, blue light-emitting elements B1 and B2 each having a different emission spectrum are disposed as the light-emittinglayers FIG 40B . - Note that in the case where blue light-emitting elements B1 and B2 each having a different emission spectrum are disposed as the light-emitting elements which emit short-wavelength monochromatic light, the thickness of the blue light-emitting elements B1 and B2 is varied like light-emitting
layers FIGS. 41A and 41B to vary emission spectrums. For example, in the case of a top emission structure as shown inFIG 41A , the blue light-emittinglayers layers FIG 41B , and the color conversion layers may be disposed below the first pixel, the second pixel, the fourth pixel, and the fifth pixel. Note that each structure of the display device in the invention shown inFIGS. 41A and 41B conforms toFIGS. 40A and 40B . - The color conversion method for converting a color of light emitted from a light-emitting element into a required color through a color conversion layer is advantageous in that there is no need for separately coloring the light-emitting layers since a luminous color emitted from the light-emitting element is a monochromatic color. In addition, compared to a color filter method, the color conversion method is preferable since it obtains desired light emission with the color conversion layers using a process of absorption of light, excitation, and light emission.
- Note that this embodiment can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- In this embodiment mode, a configuration which is different from the arrangement of pixels in one picture element described in the aforementioned embodiment modes in
FIG 2 is described. - Note that description has been made of the configuration of the pixel portion of the invention where the picture element of the invention includes the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel in
FIG. 2 . In addition, a light-emitting element is provided in each of the first pixel to the sixth pixel such that a light-emitting element R1, a light-emitting element R2, a light-emitting element G1, a light-emitting element G2, a light-emitting element B1, and a light-emitting element B2 are connected to the first pixel, the second pixel, the third pixel, the fourth pixel, the fifth pixel, and the sixth pixel, respectively. - In the disposition of pixels of a display device in this embodiment mode, a
first pixel 1601, asecond pixel 1602, athird pixel 1603, afourth pixel 1604, afifth pixel 1605, and asixth pixel 1606 which are included in apicture element 1600 as shown inFIG. 16 are arranged in stripes. - Note that each of the
first pixel 1601 to thesixth pixel 1606 is disposed in a column direction inFIG. 16 ; however, a method for disposing each pixel is not limited to this. For example, each pixel may be disposed in a row direction, or thefirst pixel 1601 having the light-emitting element R1 and thefifth pixel 1605 having the light-emitting element G2 may be disposed to be adjacent to each other. In addition, the shape of each pixel is not limited to a rectangle as shown inFIG. 16 , and for example, a square, other polygons, or a shape having a curvature may be employed. - Note also that the
first pixel 1601 to thesixth pixel 1606 may be disposed either at even intervals or not. - In addition, in
FIG. 53A , thefirst pixel 1601, thesecond pixel 1602, and thethird pixel 1603 are arranged in the first row while thefourth pixel 1604, thefifth pixel 1605, and thesixth pixel 1606 are arranged in the next row, and the row of thefirst pixel 1601, thesecond pixel 1602, and thethird pixel 1603, and the row of thefourth pixel 1604, thefifth pixel 1605, and thesixth pixel 1606 may be shifted by one pixel. In this embodiment mode, the row of thefirst pixel 1601, thesecond pixel 1602, and thethird pixel 1603, and the row of thefourth pixel 1604, thefifth pixel 1605, and thesixth pixel 1606 are shifted by one pixel in the row direction; however, the number of pixels is not particularly limited to one. For example, the row of thefirst pixel 1601, thesecond pixel 1602, and thethird pixel 1603, and the row of thefourth pixel 1604, thefifth pixel 1605, and thesixth pixel 1606 may be shifted by half a pixel as shown inFIG. 53B . By employing an arrangement where pixels are shifted in this manner, smooth display can be conducted particularly at the time of displaying a natural image which is moving. - In the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G1, the light-emitting element G2, the light-emitting element B1, and the light-emitting element B2, the luminous efficiency varies depending on a light-emitting element which presents each luminous color. Thus, in order to obtain light emission with desired luminance, relatively larger current is required to be supplied to a light-emitting element having low luminous efficiency. Further, human eyes have different sensitivity to each emission wavelength, and in general, human eyes have higher sensitivity to a green wavelength than a red wavelength or a blue wavelength. Accordingly, in order to make the blue light-emitting element or the red light-emitting element emit light with the same luminous efficiency as the green light-emitting element, luminance of the blue light-emitting element or the red light-emitting element needs to be set relatively higher than the luminance of the green light-emitting element. However, when much current is supplied to the light-emitting element in order to obtain higher luminance, deterioration of the light-emitting element is promoted and power consumption of the display device is increased. In addition, if a wavelength is shifted due to deterioration of the light-emitting element, the color reproducibility of the display device may be decreased, which in turn decreases the image quality.
- Therefore, a structure where area dimensions of the light-emitting element R1, the light-emitting element R2, the light-emitting element G1, the light-emitting element G2, the light-emitting element B1, and the light-emitting element B2 are varied in advance may be employed. For example, a structure where area dimensions of the light-emitting elements R1, R2, B1, and B2 are doubled while area dimensions of the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 are kept unchanged may be employed. By employing such a structure, variations of deterioration among the light-emitting elements can be averaged, and thus, it is preferable.
- Unlike the structure shown in
FIG 16 , pixels of the display device in this embodiment mode shown inFIG. 17 which include afirst pixel 1701, asecond pixel 1702, athird pixel 1703, afourth pixel 1704, afifth pixel 1705, and asixth pixel 1706 in apicture element 1700 are arranged such that thefirst pixel 1701, thesecond pixel 1702, and thethird pixel 1703 are arranged in delta pattern, and thefourth pixel 1704, thefifth pixel 1705, and thesixth pixel 1706 are also arranged in delta pattern. - A structure where area dimensions of the
first pixel 1701, thefourth pixel 1704, and thesecond pixel 1702 are varied from each other as well as area dimensions of thefifth pixel 1705, thethird pixel 1703, and thesixth pixel 1706 are varied from each other is employed inFIG. 17 ; however, the invention is not limited to this. The area dimensions of thefirst pixel 1701, thefourth pixel 1704, and thesecond pixel 1702 may be the same as well as the area dimensions of thefifth pixel 1705, thethird pixel 1703, and thesixth pixel 1706 may be the same, or a structure where all of the first light-emittingelement 1701 to thesixth pixel 1706 have different area dimensions from each other may be employed. In addition, a structure of a picture element is not particularly limited, and a structure where an image is formed by apicture element 1710 may be employed. - In addition, for example, the
first pixel 1701 having the light-emitting element R1 and thethird pixel 1703 having the light-emitting element B1 may be disposed to be adjacent to each other. In addition, the shape of each pixel is not limited to a rectangle as shown inFIG 17 , and for example, a square, other polygons, or a shape having a curvature may be employed. Note that thefirst pixel 1701 to thesixth pixel 1706 may be disposed either at even intervals or not. - Further, in the display device of the invention, pixels are not limited to the first pixel to the sixth pixel. A structure where a
first pixel 1801, asecond pixel 1802, athird pixel 1803, afourth pixel 1804, a fifth pixel 1805, asixth pixel 1806, aseventh pixel 1807, aneighth pixel 1808, and aninth pixel 1809 are provided may be employed as shown inFIG. 18 . Note that a structure where theseventh pixel 1807 has a light-emitting element R3, theeighth pixel 1808 has a light-emitting element G3, and theninth pixel 1809 has a light-emitting element B3 is employed. - In
FIG 18 , a structure where area dimensions of thefirst pixel 1801, thefourth pixel 1804, and theseventh pixel 1807 are varied from each other, area dimensions of thesecond pixel 1802, the fifth light-emitting element 1805, and theeighth pixel 1808 are varied from each other, and area dimensions of thethird pixel 1803, thesixth pixel 1806, and theninth pixel 1809 are varied from each other is employed; however, the invention is not limited to this. The area dimensions of thefirst pixel 1801, thefourth pixel 1804, and theseventh pixel 1807 may be the same, the area dimensions of thesecond pixel 1802, the fifth pixel 1805, and theeighth pixel 1808 may be the same, and the area dimensions of thethird pixel 1803, thesixth pixel 1806, and theninth pixel 1809 may be the same, or a structure where all of thefirst pixel 1801 to theninth pixel 1809 have different area dimensions from each other may be employed. - In addition, in the display device of the invention, pixels are not limited to the first pixel to the sixth pixel. A structure where a
first pixel 1901, asecond pixel 1902, and athird pixel 1903, afourth pixel 1904, afifth pixel 1905, asixth pixel 1906, and aseventh pixel 1907 are arranged may be employed as shown inFIG. 19A . Note that theseventh pixel 1907 has a structure where a white light-emitting element W is provided. - Note that the light-emitting element W of the
seventh pixel 1907 has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are in the range of 0.30 to 0.40 and in the range of 0.30 to 0.40, respectively. More preferably, the light-emitting element W of theseventh pixel 1907 has chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are in the range of 0.30 to 0.35 and in the range of 0.30 to 0.35, respectively. - A structure where the area dimensions of the
first pixel 1901 and thefourth pixel 1904 are the same, the area dimensions of thesecond pixel 1902 and thefifth pixel 1905 are the same, and the area dimensions of thethird pixel 1903 and thesixth pixel 1906 are the same is employed inFIG. 19A ; however, the invention is not limited to this. A structure where area dimensions of thefirst pixel 1901 and thefourth pixel 1904 vary from each other, area dimensions of thesecond pixel 1902 and thefifth pixel 1905 vary from each other, and area dimensions of thethird pixel 1903 and thesixth pixel 1906 vary from each other may be employed, or a structure where all of thepixel 1901 to thesixth pixel 1906 have different area dimensions from each other may be employed. - A structure which is different from
FIG 19A is shown inFIG. 19B . What is different fromFIG. 19A is the disposition of thefirst pixel 1901, thesecond pixel 1902, and thethird pixel 1903, thefourth pixel 1904, thefifth pixel 1905, thesixth pixel 1906, and theseventh pixel 1907. Needless to say, disposition of each pixel is not particularly limited to this. In addition, the shape of each pixel is not limited to a rectangle as shown inFIG. 19A , and for example, a square, other polygons, or a shape having a curvature may be employed. - Note that by providing the light-emitting element W which emits white light in the seventh pixel, power consumption can be reduced since a white color can be displayed by using light emission of only the light-emitting element W compared to the case of displaying a white color by using a color mixture of the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2, and thus, it is preferable. In addition, when a neutral color is displayed by an additive color mixture using a white color, more reduction in power consumption can be expected, and thus, it is preferable.
- Note also that in the display device of the invention, a structure of a picture element where a light-emitting element W1 which emits white light is provided in the seventh pixel, and a light-emitting element W2 which emits white light is provided in the eighth pixel may also be employed. As well as the aforementioned light-emitting elements R1 and R2, light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and light-emitting elements B1 and B2, emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements W1 and W2 are varied from each other. Accordingly, a display device which displays more bright colors and has reduced power consumption can be provided.
- Note that the light-emitting element W1 of the seventh pixel and the light-emitting element W2 of the eighth pixel have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are in the range of 0.30 to 0.40 and in the range of 0.30 to 0.40, respectively. More preferably, the light-emitting element W1 of the seventh pixel and the light-emitting element W2 of the eighth pixel have chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are in the range of 0.30 to 0.35 and in the range of 0.30 to 0.35, respectively.
- Note that this embodiment can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- In this embodiment mode, configurations described in the aforementioned embodiment modes which are different from the pixel configuration and the operation method shown in
FIG 4 andFIG. 5 are described. - According to the pixel configuration and the operation method shown in
FIG. 4 andFIG. 5 , there is an advantage that the length of sustain (light-emitting) periods can be freely set since address (writing) periods and the sustain (light-emitting)periods are completely separated; however, in the address (writing) periods, neither writing nor light emission is conducted in any other rows while writing is conducted in a certain row. That is, the duty ratio as a whole is decreased. - Consequently, an operation where the address (writing) periods and the sustain (light-emitting) periods are not separated is described.
- A pixel configuration for achieving the aforementioned operation is shown in
FIG. 20 . The pixel configuration shown inFIG 20 includes afirst transistor 2001 for switching to control input of a video signal (also called a switching transistor), asecond transistor 2002 for driving to decide the state of lighting or non-lighting of a light-emitting element by the video signal (also called a driving transistor), athird transistor 2003 for erasing a gate-source voltage of the second transistor 2002 (also called an erasing transistor), a light-emittingelement 2004, astorage capacitor 2005, asignal line 2006, afirst scan line 2007, asecond scan line 2008, apower supply line 2009, and anopposite electrode 2010. Thestorage capacitor 2005 is provided so as to hold a gate-source voltage (gate voltage) of thefirst transistor 2001 and thesecond transistor 2002 more accurately; however, it is not necessarily required. Note that voltage means a potential difference from a ground unless otherwise specified. In addition, the light-emittingelement 2004 corresponds to the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2 inFIG. 2 . - The
first transistor 2001 is controlled by using thefirst scan line 2007. When thefirst transistor 2001 is turned on, a video signal is input from thesignal line 2006 to thestorage capacitor 2005. Then, in response to the video signal, thesecond transistor 2002 is turned on/off, and a current flows from thepower supply line 2009 to theopposite electrode 2010 through the light-emittingelement 2004. - In the case of erasing a video signal, the
second scan line 2008 is selected to turn on thethird transistor 2003, and turn off thesecond transistor 2002. Then, a current does not flow from thepower supply line 2009 to theopposite electrode 2010 through the light-emittingelement 2004. Accordingly, a non-lighting period can be made so that the length of a lighting period can be freely controlled. - Next, a timing chart in the case of conducting an operation of erasing a signal of a pixel is shown in
FIG. 21 . In this embodiment mode, a case where a 3-bit digital video signal is used in a digital time gray scale method similarly toFIG. 5 is described as an example. In the digital time gray scale method, oneframe period 2101 is further divided into a plurality of sub frame periods. Here, since the video signal has 3 bits, the oneframe period 2101 is divided into three sub frame periods, and writing and displaying of each luminous color are conducted in each sub frame period. - In
FIG 21 , each sub frame period includes an address (writing) period Ta# (# is a natural number) and a sustain (light-emitting) period Ts#. InFIG. 21 , in each sub frame period which is obtained by dividing the oneframe period 2101, it can be seen that the address (writing) period and the sustain (light-emitting) period are not separated. That is, upon completion of writing in an i-th row, light emission is started immediately in the i-th row. After that, while writing is conducted in an (i + 1)-th row, the i-th row is already in the sustain (light-emitting) period. By employing such timing, the duty ratio can be increased. - However, in the case of the timing as shown in
FIG. 21 , a period when an address (writing) period in a certain sub frame period and an address period in next sub frame period overlap with each other is generated if the sustain (light-emitting) period is shorter than the address (writing) period. Then, as shown inFIG 20 , by using the third transistor, an erasing period Tr3 is forcibly provided from the time of finishing the sustain (light-emitting) period to the time of starting a next address (writing) period. By this erasing period Tr3, address (writing) periods in different sub frame periods can be prevented from overlapping with each other. Specifically, by using a second scan line driver circuit for controlling the third transistor, selective pulses for erasing are sequentially output from a first row to turn on the third transistor at desired timing. Note that the second scan line driver circuit may have the same configuration as a first scan line driver circuit which conducts normal writing. Accordingly, a period of writing signals for erasing (hereinafter, it is described as a reset period) Te3 has an equal length to the address (writing) period. - Note that although a case where the number of gray scale display bits and the number of sub frames are the same is given as an example here, one frame may be further divided. In addition, gray scales can be expressed even when the length ratio of the sustain (light-emitting) periods is not necessarily the power of two. By employing the pixel configuration shown in
FIG. 20 in this manner, the length of the lighting period in each row can be easily controlled. - By employing the pixel configuration as shown in
FIG. 20 , many sub frames can be arranged in one frame even if a signal writing operation is slow. In addition, in the case of conducting the erasing operation, a driving frequency of a source driver can also be reduced since there is no need for acquiring data for erasing like a video signal. - Alternatively, in the pixel configurations in
FIG. 4 andFIG. 20 , a field sequential method may be employed. InFIG 22A , one frame period denoted by 2201 in the pixel configuration ofFIG. 4 is divided into six periods denoted by 2202 to 2207, and writing and displaying of each luminous color are conducted in each period. In addition, inFIG. 22B , one frame period denoted by 2201 in the pixel configuration ofFIG 20 is divided into six periods shown with 2202 to 2207, and writing and displaying of each luminous color are conducted in each period. - Note that in
FIGS. 22A and 22B , a case where a 3-bit digital video signal is used in a digital time gray scale method is given as an example. In the digital time gray scale method, the oneframe period 2201 is further divided into a plurality of sub frame periods. Here, since the video signal has 3 bits, the oneframe period 2201 is divided into three sub frame periods. - Note also that in
FIGS. 22A and 22B , one of the six periods denoted by thefirst period 2202, thesecond period 2203, thethird period 2204, thefourth period 2205, thefifth period 2206, and thesixth period 2207 which correspond to the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2, for example, thefirst period 2202 is described. - In the
first period 2202, each sub frame period includes an address (writing) period Ta1# (# is a natural number) and a sustain (light-emitting) period Ts1#. In addition, in thesecond period 2203, each sub frame period includes an address (writing) period Ta2# (# is a natural number) and a sustain (light-emitting) period Ts2#. Hereinafter, thethird period 2204 to thesixth period 2207 are described in the same manner. - In
FIG 22A , the length of the sustain (light-emitting) periods is Ts11 : Ts12 : Ts13 = 4 : 2 : 1, and 23 = 8 gray scales are expressed by controlling the state of lighting or non-lighting of the light-emitting element in each sustain (light-emitting) period. That is, each sustain (light-emitting) period is set to have a power-of-two length of a previous sustain (light-emitting) period such that Ts11 : Ts12 : Ts13 = 2(n-1) : 2(n-2) : ··· : 21 : 20. For example, in the case where a light-emitting element emits light only in Ts13, and a light-emitting element does not emit light in Ts11 and Ts12, light emission is obtained only in about 14% of all of the sustain (light-emitting) periods. That is, luminance of about 14% can be expressed. In the case where a light-emitting element emits light in Ts1 and Ts2, and a light-emitting element doe not emit light in Ts3, light emission is obtained in about 86% of all of the sustain (light-emitting) periods. That is, luminance of about 86% can be expressed. - As shown in
FIG.21 , by conducting this operation repeatedly to express luminous colors of the first to sixth pixels, that is, the light-emitting elements R1, R2, G1, G2, B1, and B2 inFIG. 2 , a viewer can view multicolor display by a residual image effect. - Although the
third transistor 2003 is used inFIG. 20 , another method can be employed as long as a current can be controlled not to be supplied to the light-emitting 2004 by forcibly making a non-lighting period. Accordingly, the non-lighting period may be made by disposing a switch in somewhere on a path where a current flows from thepower supply line 2009 to theopposite electrode 2010 through the light-emittingelement 2004, and by controlling on/off of the switch. Alternatively, the gate-source voltage of thesecond transistor 2002 may be controlled to forcibly turn off thesecond transistor 2002. - An example of a pixel configuration in the case of forcibly turning off the
second transistor 2002 is shown inFIG. 23 . What is different fromFIG. 20 is that an erasingdiode 2301 is connected between a gate of asecond transistor 2002 and asecond scan line 2008. - In the case of erasing a video signal, the second scan line 2008 (here, it is set to be at a high potential) is selected to turn on the erasing
diode 2301, thereby a current flows from thesecond scan line 2008 to the gate of thesecond transistor 2002. Accordingly, thesecond transistor 2002 is turned off. Then, a current does not flow from thepower supply line 2009 to theopposite electrode 2010 through the light-emittingelement 2004. Accordingly, a non-lighting period can be made so that the length of a lighting period can be freely controlled. - In the case of holding the video signal, the second scan line 2008 (here, it is set to be at a low potential) is not selected. Then, the erasing
diode 2301 is turned off so that the gate potential of thesecond transistor 2002 is held. - Note that the erasing
diode 2301 may be any element as long as it has a rectifying property. Such an element may be a PN junction diode, a PIN diode, a Schottky diode, or a zener diode. - In addition, the erasing
diode 2301 may be a diode-connected transistor (a transistor whose gate and drain are connected). A circuit diagram at this case is shown inFIG. 24 . As the erasingdiode 2301, a diode-connectedtransistor 2401 is employed. Here, an n-channel transistor is employed; however, the invention is not limited to this. A p-channel transistor may also be employed. - Note that timing charts, pixel configurations, and driving methods shown in this embodiment mode are only exemplary, and the invention is not limited to these. Various types of timing charts, pixel configurations, and driving methods can be applied.
- Next, an operation region of a driving transistor in the case of a digital gray scale method is described. Note that
FIG. 25 is a characteristic diagram of an operation of the transistor where a horizontal axis shows a gate-source voltage of the transistor while a vertical axis shows a source-drain current of the transistor. - For example, in the case of operating the transistor in the saturation region, there is an advantage that the value of a current which flows to the light-emitting element does not change even if a current-voltage characteristic of the light-emitting element is deteriorated. Thus, the display device is hardly influenced by ghosting. However, if a current characteristic of the driving transistor varies, a current which flows thereto also varies. Therefore, there is a case where display unevenness is generated.
- On the other hand, in the case of operating the transistor in the linear region, the value of a current which flows thereto is hardly influenced even if the current characteristic of the driving transistor varies. Thus, display unevenness is hardly generated. In addition, power consumption can also be reduced since (the absolute value of) a gate-source voltage of the driving transistor does not become too large.
- Further, when (the absolute value of) a gate-source voltage of the driving transistor is increased, a current which flows thereto is hardly influenced even if the current characteristic of the driving transistor varies. However, when the current-voltage characteristic of the light-emitting element is deteriorated, there is a case where the value of a current which flows thereto is changed. Therefore, the display device is easily influenced by ghosting.
- When the driving transistor operates in the saturation region in this manner, the value of a current does not change even if the characteristics of the light-emitting element change. Accordingly, in this case, the driving transistor can be regarded as operating as a current source. Therefore, this driving is called a constant current driving.
- In addition, when the driving transistor operates in the linear region, the value of the current does not change even if the current characteristic of the driving transistor varies. Accordingly, in this case, the driving transistor can be regarded as operating as a switch. Thus, it is regarded that a voltage of the power supply line is directly applied to the light-emitting element. Therefore, this driving is called a constant voltage driving.
- The invention can employ either the constant current driving or the constant voltage driving. Accordingly, whether to employ the constant current driving or the constant voltage driving may be changed appropriately in view of variations of the light-emitting element and the transistor.
- Note that this embodiment can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- In this embodiment mode, description is made of another layout structure of each pixel and each wire in the invention.
-
FIG 26 shows a layout diagram of the circuit diagram shown inFIG 4 . Note that the circuit diagram and the layout diagram are not limited toFIG 4 andFIG 26 , respectively. -
Switching transistors transistors transistors 2641A and 2601B are connected to asignal line 2604, while drains thereof are connected to gates of the drivingtransistors transistor 2601A is connected to ascan line 2605A, while a gate of the switchingtransistor 2601B is connected to ascan line 2605B. Sources of the drivingtransistors power supply line 2606, while drains thereof are connected to the electrodes of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, respectively. Although a storage capacitor (not shown) is connected between the gate of either the drivingtransistor power supply line 2606, it is not necessarily required. - Note that the number of the
signal lines 2604 may be more than one corresponding to the drivingtransistors - The
signal line 2604 and thepower supply line 2606 are formed of a second wire, while thescan lines -
FIG 27 shows a top view of a pixel configuration corresponding toFIG. 26 . Reference numerals denoting the respective portions inFIG. 27 correspond to those inFIG. 26 . - In
FIG 27 , in the case of a top-gate structure, films of a substrate, a semiconductor layer, a gate insulating film, a first wire, an interlayer insulating film, and a second wire are formed in this order. In the case of a bottom-gate structure, films of a substrate, a first wire, a gate insulating film, a semiconductor layer, an interlayer insulating film, and a second wire are formed in this order. In addition, inFIG. 27 ,storage capacitors - Although the description has been made of a double-gate structure where each of the switching
transistors - In
FIG. 27 , when the distance between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in the same picture element is denoted by D1, the distance between the light-emitting element R1 and a light-emitting element R2 of a picture element in another row is denoted by D2. According to a mode ofFIG. 27 in this embodiment mode, a structure where D1 < D2 is provided, and thus the distance between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in the same picture element can be shortened. In the invention, the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 are arranged in parallel in the column direction (the vertical direction inFIG. 26 ), and no scan line is disposed between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 as shown inFIG. 27 , which is preferable in that a color mixture of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 can be more visible. Needless to say, light-emitting elements G1 and G2, and light-emitting elements B1 and B2 preferably have a similar structure to the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in order to make a color mixture more visible. In addition, in the case of arranging the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in parallel in the row direction (the horizontal direction inFIG. 26 ), it is preferable not to dispose a power supply line between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2, which allows the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 to be located more closer to each other. - In the pixel of
FIG 26 , thescan line 2605B can be replaced by ascan line 2605A of a pixel in another row. That is, thescan line 2605B of the display device shown inFIG. 26 can be omitted.FIG 28 shows an exemplary configuration in the case where thescan line 2605B in the pixel ofFIG 26 is omitted and replaced by thescan line 2605A of a pixel in another row. - The configurations of the display device shown in
FIGS. 26 and28 are only illustrative, and thus the invention is not limited to these. For example, the power supply line is not necessarily required to be disposed in parallel with the signal line, and may be provided in parallel with the scan line, or each power supply line may be provided in grid patterns. That is, the power supply line in the pixel inFIG. 26 may be provided in parallel with the scan line as shown inFIG 29 . - As described above, wires provided around a pixel of the display device of the invention can have various structures, and thus the invention is not limited to the structures described in this specification.
- Note that this embodiment mode can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- In this embodiment mode, description is made of a structure of a display panel having a pixel configuration shown in the aforementioned embodiment, with reference to
FIGS. 30A and 30B . - Note that
FIG. 30A is a top view showing a display panel, andFIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view taken along a line A-A' ofFIG. 30A . The display panel includes a signalline driver circuit 3001, apixel portion 3002, a first scanline driver circuit 3003, and a second scanline driver circuit 3006, which are shown by dotted lines. The display panel also includes a sealingsubstrate 3004 and asealant 3005, and the inner side of thesealant 3005 is aspace 3007. - Note that a
wire 3008 is a wire for transmitting signals to be input into the first scanline driver circuit 3003, the second scanline driver circuit 3006, and the signalline driver circuit 3001, and receives video signals, clock signals, start signals, and the like from an FPC 3009 (Flexible Printed Circuit) which serves as an external input terminal. An IC chip 3019 (a semiconductor chip incorporating a memory circuit, a buffer circuit, and the like) is mounted on a connecting portion between theFPC 3009 and the display panel by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like. Although only an FPC is shown in the drawing, a printed wiring board (PWB) may be attached to the FPC. A display device in this specification includes not only a main body of a display panel, but includes a display panel in the condition that an FPC or a PWB is attached. Further, it also includes a display panel on which an IC chip and the like are mounted. - Next, a cross-sectional structure is described with reference to
FIG. 30B . Although thepixel portion 3002 and its peripheral driver circuits (the first scanline driver circuit 3003, the second scanline driver circuit 3006, and the signal line driver circuit 3001) are actually formed over thesubstrate 3010, only the signalline driver circuit 3001 and thepixel portion 3002 are shown herein. - The signal
line driver circuit 3001 is constructed from transistors of single conductivity type, such as an n-channel TFT 3020 and an n-channel TFT 3021. Note that in the case of constructing pixels by using transistors of single conductivity type, given that a peripheral driver circuit is constructed by using only n-channel transistors, a single conductivity type display panel can be manufactured. Needless to say, not only transistors of single conductivity type, but a CMOS circuit constructed from an n-channel transistor and a p-channel transistor may be used. In addition, although this embodiment mode shows a display panel where a pixel portion and peripheral driver circuits are formed over the same substrate, the invention is not necessarily limited to this and a part or all of the peripheral driver circuits may be formed in an IC chip so that it is mounted on the display panel by COG or the like. In such a case, the driver circuit is not required to be formed from transistors of single conductivity type, and thus it may be formed by combining an n-channel transistor and a p-channel transistor. - The
pixel portion 3002 includes aTFT 3011 and aTFT 3012. Note that a source electrode of theTFT 3012 is connected to a first electrode 3013 (pixel electrode). In addition, aninsulator 3014 is formed covering the edge of thefirst electrode 3013. Here, theinsulator 3014 is formed by using a positive photosensitive acrylic resin film. - In order to obtain an excellent coverage, a top edge or a bottom edge of the
insulator 3014 is formed to have a curved surface with a curvature. For example, in the case of using positive photosensitive acrylic as a material of theinsulator 3014, it is preferable to form only the top edge of theinsulator 3014 to have a curvature radius (0.2 to 3 µm). Alternatively, theinsulator 3014 can be formed by using a negative photoresist which becomes insoluble in etchant by light or a positive photoresist which becomes soluble in etchant by light. - A light-emitting
layer 3016 and a second electrode 3017 (opposite electrode) are formed over thefirst electrode 3013. Here, as a material used for thefirst electrode 3013 functioning as an anode, a material with a high work function is desirably used. For example, thefirst electrode 3103 can be formed with a single film such as an ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) film, an indium zinc oxide (IZO) film, a titanium nitride film, a chromium film, a tungsten film, a Zn film, or a Pt film, stacked layers of a titanium nitride film and a film containing aluminum as its main component, or a three-layer structure of a titanium nitride film, a film containing aluminum as its main component, and a titanium nitride film, or the like. When thefirst electrode 3103 is formed to have a stacked structure, low resistance as a wire can be obtained, an excellent ohmic contact can be formed, and further a function as an anode can be obtained. - The light-emitting
layer 3016 is formed by a vapor deposition method using a vapor-deposition mask or an ink-jet method. A part of the light-emittinglayer 3016 is formed by using a metal complex of theGroup 4 in the periodic table, which may be combined with either a low molecular material or a high molecular material. In general, the material used for the light-emitting layer is often an organic compound with a single layer or stacked layers; however, a structure where a film made of an organic compound partially contains an inorganic compound may be used as well. Further, known triplet materials can be used. - As a material used for the
second electrode 3017 formed over the light-emittinglayer 3016, a material with a low work function (e.g., Al, Ag, Li, or Ca; or alloys of these such as MgAg, MgIn, AlLi, CaF2, or calcium nitride) may be used. Note that in the case where light generated in the light-emittinglayer 3016 is made travel through thesecond electrode 3017, the second electrode 3017 (cathode) is preferably formed of stacked layers of a thin metal film and a light-transmissive conductive film (e.g., ITO (an alloy of indium oxide and tin oxide), an alloy of indium oxide and zinc oxide (In2O3-ZnO), zinc oxide (ZnO), or the like). - Further, by attaching the sealing
substrate 3004 to thesubstrate 3010 with thesealant 3005, a structure where a light-emittingelement 3018 is provided in thespace 3007 surrounded by thesubstrate 3010, the sealingsubstrate 3004, and thesealant 3005 is formed. Note that thespace 3007 may be filled with an inert gas (e.g., nitrogen, argon, or the like) or filled with thesealant 3005. - Note that the
sealant 3005 is preferably formed with an epoxy resin. In addition, such a material desirably transmits as little moisture and oxygen as possible. As a material used for the sealingsubstrate 3004, a plastic substrate made of FRP (Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastics), PVF (PolyVinyl Fluoride), mylar, polyester, acrylic, or the like can be used in addition to a glass substrate or a quartz substrate. - In this manner, a display panel having a pixel configuration of the invention can be obtained. Note that the aforementioned configuration is only illustrative, and thus the structure of the display panel of the invention is not limited to this.
- By forming the signal
line driver circuit 3001, thepixel portion 3002, the first scanline driver circuit 3003, and the second scanline driver circuit 3006 over the same substrate as shown inFIG 30 , cost reduction of the display device can be achieved. In addition, in this case, when the signalline driver circuit 3001, thepixel portion 3002, the first scanline driver circuit 3003, and the second scanline driver circuit 3006 are formed by using transistors of single conductivity type, the manufacturing process can be simplified, which leads to a further cost reduction. - Note that a structure of a display panel is not limited to the structure where the signal
line driver circuit 3001, thepixel portion 3002, the first scanline driver circuit 3003, and the second scanline driver circuit 3006 are formed over the same substrate as shown inFIG. 30A , and a structure where a signalline driver circuit 3101 shown inFIG 31 which corresponds to the signalline driver circuit 3001 is formed in an IC chip so that it is mounted on the display panel by COG or the like may be used. Note that asubstrate 3100, apixel portion 3102, a first scanline driver circuit 3103, a second scanline driver circuit 3104, anFPC 3105, anIC chip 3106, anIC chip 3107, a sealingsubstrate 3108, and asealant 3109 inFIG. 31A correspond to thesubstrate 3010, thepixel portion 3002, the first scanline driver circuit 3003, the second scanline driver circuit 3006, theFPC 3009, theIC chip 3019, the sealingsubstrate 3004, and thesealant 3005 inFIG. 30A , respectively. - That is, only a signal line driver circuit which is required to perform a high-speed operation is formed in an IC chip using a CMOS or the like in order to achieve low power consumption. In addition, by forming an IC chip using a semiconductor chip such as a silicon wafer, a higher-speed operation and lower power consumption can be achieved.
- By forming the first scan
line driver circuit 3103 and the second scanline driver circuit 3104 over the same substrate as thepixel portion 3102, cost reduction can be achieved. Further, by forming the first scanline driver circuit 3103, the second scanline driver circuit 3104, and thepixel portion 3102 using transistors of single conductivity type, further cost reduction can be achieved. As a configuration of pixels included in thepixel portion 3102, the pixels shown inEmbodiment Modes - In this manner, cost reduction of a high-definition display device can be achieved. In addition, by mounting an IC chip which incorporates a functional circuit (e.g., a memory or a buffer) on a connecting portion between the
FPC 3105 and thesubstrate 3100, the substrate area can be effectively utilized. - Alternatively, after forming a signal
line driver circuit 3111, a first scanline driver circuit 3114, and a second scanline driver circuit 3113 inFIG. 31B , which correspond to the signalline driver circuit 3001, the first scanline driver circuit 3003, and the second scanline driver circuit 3006 inFIG. 30A , respectively, in IC chips, the IC chips may be mounted on the display panel by COG or the like. In this case, power consumption of a high-definition display device can be further reduced. Therefore, in order to obtain a display device with lower power consumption, polysilicon is desirably used for semiconductor layers of the transistors which are used in the pixel portion. Asubstrate 3110, apixel portion 3112, anFPC 3115, anIC chip 3116, anIC chip 3117, a sealingsubstrate 3118, and asealant 3119 inFIG. 31B correspond to thesubstrate 3010, thepixel portion 3002, theFPC 3009, theIC chip 3019, the sealingsubstrate 3004, and thesealant 3005 inFIG. 30A , respectively. - In addition, by using amorphous silicon for semiconductor layers of the transistors in the
pixel portion 3112, further cost reduction can be achieved. Further, a large display panel can be manufactured. - The second scan line driver circuit, the first scan line driver circuit, and the signal line driver circuit are not required to be provided in the row direction and the column direction of the pixels. For example, as shown in
FIG. 32A , aperipheral driver circuit 3201 formed in an IC chip may incorporate the functions of the first scanline driver circuit 3114, the second scanline driver circuit 3113, and the signalline driver circuit 3111 shown inFIG 31B . Note that asubstrate 3200, apixel portion 3202, anFPC 3204, anIC chip 3205, anIC chip 3206, a sealingsubstrate 3207, and asealant 3208 inFIG. 32A correspond to thesubstrate 3010, thepixel portion 3002, theFPC 3009, theIC chip 3019, the sealingsubstrate 3004, and thesealant 3005 inFIG 30A , respectively. -
FIG. 32B shows a schematic view for illustrating a connection of wires in the display device ofFIG 32A . The display device includes asubstrate 3210, aperipheral driver circuit 3211, apixel portion 3212, anFPC 3213, and anFPC 3214. External signals and power supply potentials are input into theperipheral driver circuit 3211 from theFPC 3213. Output from theperipheral driver circuit 3211 is input into wires in the row and column directions which are connected to the pixels included in thepixel portion 3212. - As described above, a display panel of the display device of the invention can have various structures, and thus is not limited to the structures described in this specification.
- Note that this embodiment mode can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- In this embodiment mode, description is made of another structure of each pixel and a cross-sectional structure of a transistor in the invention.
-
FIGS. 44A to 44C show exemplary circuit diagrams in this embodiment mode. Note that the circuit diagram is not limited to the ones shown inFIGS. 44A to 44C . The circuit diagrams illustrated inFIGS. 44A to 44C are the circuit diagrams using only n-channel transistors. By constructing a circuit which constitutes a pixel by using only n-channel transistors, a display device which can be formed through a simple process and can accommodate a large substrate can be provided. Hereinafter, specific examples of them are described. -
FIG. 44A shows a circuit configuration. In a pixel, afirst transistor 4401, asecond transistor 4402, and a light-emittingelement 4406 are disposed. Asignal line 4403 to which video signals are input is connected to a gate of thesecond transistor 4402 through thefirst transistor 4401. A gate of thefirst transistor 4401 is connected to ascan line 4407. Thesecond transistor 4402 and a light-emittingelement 4406 are connected between a firstpower supply line 4404 and a secondpower supply line 4405. Current flows from the firstpower supply line 4404 to the secondpower supply line 4405. The light-emittingelement 4406 emits light in accordance with the amount of current flowing thereto. - A storage capacitor may be provided in order to hold video signals input to the gate of the
second transistor 4402. In that case, the storage capacitor may be provided either between the gate of thesecond transistor 4402 and a drain of thesecond transistor 4402, or between the gate of thesecond transistor 4402 and a source of thesecond transistor 4402. Alternatively, the storage capacitor may be provided between the gate of thesecond transistor 4402 and another wire (a dedicated wire, a scan line of a pixel in the preceding row, or the like). As a further alternative, the storage capacitor may be replaced by the gate capacitance of thesecond transistor 4402. Note that thesecond transistor 4402 and thefirst transistor 4401 are n-channel transistors. -
FIG 44B shows another circuit configuration of this embodiment mode. In a pixel, afirst transistor 6001, asecond transistor 6002, a third transistor 6009 (also called a storage transistor), astorage capacitor 6010, and a light-emittingelement 6006 are disposed. Asignal line 6003 to which video signals are input is connected to a source of thesecond transistor 6002 through thefirst transistor 6001. A gate of thefirst transistor 6001 is connected to ascan line 6007. Thesecond transistor 6002 and a light-emittingelement 6006 are connected between a firstpower supply line 6004 and a secondpower supply line 6005. Current flows from the firstpower supply line 6004 to the secondpower supply line 6005. The light-emittingelement 6006 emits light in accordance with the amount of current flowing thereto. Thestorage capacitor 6010 is disposed between a gate and the source of thesecond transistor 6002, and thethird transistor 6009 is connected between the gate and a drain of thesecond transistor 6002. A gate of thethird transistor 6009 is connected to thescan line 6007. - A
current source circuit 6008 is disposed in a signal line driver circuit. Thecurrent source circuit 6008 supplies a current to a pixel in accordance with the size of a video signal. A video signal which is supplied to thesource signal line 6003 upon selection of thescan line 6007 is input to thesecond transistor 6002. At this time, no current flows into the light-emittingelement 6006 because of the potential relationship between the firstpower supply line 6004 and the secondpower supply line 6005, since the potential of the firstpower supply line 6004 is changed. Then, a gate-source voltage of thesecond transistor 6002 with a required level is held in thestorage capacitor 6010 in accordance with the size of a video signal. After that, thescan line 6007 is turned into a non-selection state, so that the charges accumulated in thestorage capacitor 6010 are held. Accordingly, the gate-source voltage of thesecond transistor 6002 does not change even when the drain potential or the source potential of thesecond transistor 6002 changes. Then, the potential of the firstpower supply line 6004 returns to a former level, so that a current with an amount corresponding to a video signal flows through thesecond transistor 6002 to be delivered to the light-emittingelement 6006. -
FIG. 44C shows another circuit configuration of this embodiment mode. In a pixel, afirst transistor 7001, asecond transistor 7002, athird transistor 7009, astorage capacitor 7010, and a light-emittingelement 7006 are disposed. Asignal line 7003 to which video signals are input is connected to a gate of thesecond transistor 7002 through thefirst transistor 7001. A gate of thefirst transistor 7001 is connected to afirst scan line 7007. Thesecond transistor 7002 and a light-emittingelement 7006 are connected between a firstpower supply line 7004 and a secondpower supply line 7005. Current flows from the firstpower supply line 7004 to the secondpower supply line 7005. The light-emittingelement 7006 emits light in accordance with the amount of current flowing thereto. Thestorage capacitor 7010 is disposed between the gate and a source of thesecond transistor 7002, and thethird transistor 7009 is connected between the gate and a drain of thesecond transistor 7002. A gate of thethird transistor 7009 is connected to asecond scan line 7016. - In the circuit configuration shown in
FIG 44C , thethird transistor 7009 is turned on in response to a signal input from thesecond scan line 7016. Then, a gate-source voltage of thesecond transistor 7002 which has a level equal to the threshold voltage of thesecond transistor 7002 is held in thestorage capacitor 7010. Therefore, variations in the threshold voltage of each driving voltage can be corrected in advance. Note that a voltage higher than the threshold voltage of the transistor may be held in thestorage capacitor 7010 in advance by increasing the potential of the secondpower supply line 7005 only for an instant. - Then, a video signal supplied to the
signal line 7003 is input to the gate of thesecond transistor 7002. Then, a current corresponding to the size of a video signal flows through thesecond transistor 7002 to be delivered to the light-emittingelement 7006. - In
FIGS. 44A to 44C , the second transistor may be operated only in the saturation region, operated both in the saturation region and the linear region, or operated only in the liner region. - In the case where the second transistor is operated only in the linear region, it roughly operates as a switch. Therefore, fluctuations of characteristics of the second transistor due to the deterioration, temperature, and the like will have few effects on the switching operation. In the case where the second transistor is operated only in the linear region, whether to flow a current into the light-emitting
element 7006 or not is often controlled digitally. In that case, a time gray-scale method, an area gray-scale method, and the like may be combined in order to achieve multi-gray scales. - Next, a case is described where an amorphous silicon (a-Si:H) film is used for a semiconductor layer of a transistor in the circuit configurations shown in
FIGS. 44A to 44C .FIGS. 42A and 42B show examples of a top-gate transistor, whileFIGS. 43A and 43B andFIGS. 49A and 49B show examples of a bottom-gate transistor. -
FIG. 42A shows a cross section of a staggered transistor which uses amorphous silicon as a semiconductor layer. As shown inFIG. 42A , abase film 7602 is formed over asubstrate 7601. Further, apixel electrode 7603 is formed over thebase film 7602. In addition, afirst electrode 7604 is formed with the same material and in the same layer as thepixel electrode 7603. - As a substrate, any of a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate, and the like can be used. In addition, as the
base film 7602, a single layer of aluminum nitride (AlN), silicon oxide (SiO2), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy), or the like, or stacked layers thereof can be used. -
Wires base film 7602, and the edge of thepixel electrode 7603 is covered with thewire 7605. N-type semiconductor layers wires semiconductor layer 7609 is formed between thewires base film 7602. A part of thesemiconductor layer 7609 is extended to partially cover the n-type semiconductor layers semiconductor layer 7609 is formed of a non-crystalline semiconductor film which is made of amorphous silicon (a-Si:H), a microcrystalline semiconductor (µ-Si:H), or the like. Agate insulating film 7610 is formed over thesemiconductor layer 7609. In addition, an insulatingfilm 7611 which is formed with the same material and in the same layer as thegate insulating film 7610 is formed over thefirst electrode 7604. Note that thegate insulating film 7610 is formed of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or the like. - A
gate electrode 7612 is formed over thegate insulating film 7610. In addition, asecond electrode 7613 which is formed with the same material and in the same layer as thegate electrode 7612 is formed over thefirst electrode 7604 with the insulatingfilm 7611 sandwiched therebetween. By sandwiching the insulatingfilm 7611 between thefirst electrode 7604 and thesecond electrode 7613, astorage capacitor 7619 is formed. An interlayer insulatingfilm 7614 is formed covering the edge of thepixel electrode 7603, a drivingtransistor 7618, and thestorage capacitor 7619. - A light-emitting
layer 7615 and anopposite electrode 7616 are formed over theinterlayer insulating film 7614 and thepixel electrode 7603 positioned in an opening of theinterlayer insulating film 7614. Thus, a light-emittingelement 7617 is formed in a region where the light-emittinglayer 7615 is sandwiched between thepixel electrode 7603 and theopposite electrode 7616. - The
first electrode 7604 shown inFIG. 42A may be replaced by afirst electrode 7620 as shown inFIG 42B . Thefirst electrode 7620 is formed with the same material and in the same layer as thewires -
FIGS. 43A and 43B show partial cross sections of a display panel having a bottom-gate transistor which uses amorphous silicon as a semiconductor layer. - A
base film 7702 is formed over asubstrate 7701. Further, agate electrode 7703 is formed over thebase film 7702. In addition, afirst electrode 7704 is formed with the same material and in the same layer as thegate electrode 7703. As a material of thegate electrode 7703, polysilicon doped with phosphorus can be used. Not only polycrystalline silicon, but also silicide which is a compound of a metal and silicon may be used as well. - In addition, a
gate insulating film 7705 is formed covering thegate electrode 7703 and thefirst electrode 7704. Thegate insulating film 7705 is formed of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or the like. - A
semiconductor layer 7706 is formed over thegate insulating film 7705. In addition, asemiconductor layer 7707 is formed with the same material and in the same layer as thesemiconductor layer 7706. - As a substrate, any of a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a plastic substrate, and the like can be used. In addition, as the
base film 7702, a single layer of aluminum nitride (AlN), silicon oxide (SiO2), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy), or the like, or stacked layers thereof can be used. - N-
type semiconductor layers semiconductor layer 7706, while an n-type semiconductor layer 7710 is formed over thesemiconductor layer 7707. -
Wires type semiconductor layers conductive layer 7713 which is formed with the same material and in the same layer as thewires type semiconductor layer 7710. - A second electrode is formed of the
semiconductor layer 7707, the n-type semiconductor layer 7710, and theconductive layer 7713. Note that astorage capacitor 7720 is formed in a region where thegate insulating film 7705 is sandwiched between the second electrode and thefirst electrode 7704. - In addition, a part of the
wire 7711 is extended, and apixel electrode 7714 is formed in contact with the top surface of the extended portion of thewire 7711. - An
insulator 7715 is formed covering the edge of thepixel electrode 7714, a drivingtransistor 7719, and thestorage capacitor 7720. - A light-emitting
layer 7716 and anopposite electrode 7717 are formed over thepixel electrode 7714 and theinsulator 7715, and a light-emittingelement 7718 is formed in a region where the light-emittinglayer 7716 is sandwiched between thepixel electrode 7714 and theopposite electrode 7717. - The
semiconductor layer 7707 and the n-type semiconductor 7710 which partially function as a second electrode of the storage capacitor are not necessarily provided. That is, only theconductive layer 7713 may be used as the second electrode, so that the storage capacitor has a structure where a gate insulating film is sandwiched between thefirst electrode 7704 and theconductive layer 7713. - Note that by forming the
pixel electrode 7714 before forming thewire 7711 shown inFIG 43A , astorage capacitor 7720 as shown inFIG. 43B can be formed, which has a structure where thegate insulating film 7705 is sandwiched between thefirst electrode 7704 and asecond electrode 7721 which is formed of the same material and in the same layer as thepixel electrode 7714. - Although
FIGS. 43A and 43B show inversely staggered transistors with a channel-etched structure, a transistor with a channel-protective structure may be employed as well. Next, description is made of a case of a transistor with a channel-protective structure, with reference toFIGS. 49A and 49B . - A transistor with a channel-protective structure shown in
FIG 49A is different from the drivingtransistor 7719 with a channel-etched structure shown inFIG 43A in that aninsulator 7801 serving as an etching mask is provided over a channel formation region in thesemiconductor layer 7706. Portions common toFIGS. 49A and43A are denoted by common reference numerals. - Similarly, a transistor with a channel-protective structure shown in
FIG 49B is different from the drivingtransistor 7719 with a channel-etched structure shown inFIG. 43B in that aninsulator 7802 serving as an etching mask is provided over a channel formation region in thesemiconductor layer 7706. Portions common toFIGS. 49B and43B are denoted by common reference numerals. - By using an amorphous semiconductor film for a semiconductor layer (e.g., a channel formation region, a source region, or a drain region) of a transistor which partially constitutes a pixel of the invention, manufacturing cost can be reduced. For example, an amorphous semiconductor film can be applied by using the pixel configurations shown in
FIGS. 44A to 44C . - Note that this embodiment mode can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- In this embodiment mode, description is made of a structure of a passive display panel which can be applied to the invention.
-
FIG 47A is a top view of a pixel portion before being sealed.FIG. 47B is a cross-sectional view taken along a chain dash line A-A' inFIG 47A, and FIG 47C is a cross-sectional view taken along a chain dash line B-B' inFIG. 47A . - A plurality of
first electrodes 2113 are disposed in stripe patterns at even intervals over asubstrate 2110. Apartition wall 2114 having openings corresponding to the respective pixels is provided over thefirst electrode 2113. Thepartition wall 2114 having openings is formed of a light-shielding material (black pigment, a photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic material in which carbon black is dispersed (e.g., polyimide, acrylic, polyamide, polyimide amide, resist, or benzocyclobutene), or an SOG film (e.g., a SiOx film containing an alkyl group)). For example, a material such as COLOR MOSAIC ® CK (registered trademark of FUJIFILM OLIN Co., Ltd) is used for thepartition wall 2114 having openings. Thepartition wall 2114 having openings functions as a black matrix (BM). Note that the opening corresponding to each pixel functions as a light-emittingregion 2121. - Over the
partition wall 2114 having openings, a plurality ofparallel partition walls 2122 with inversely tapered shapes are provided, crossing thefirst electrodes 2113. The inversely taperedpartition walls 2122 are formed by photolithography using a positive photosensitive resin by which unexposed regions remain as patterns, so that lower portions of the patterns are etched more by controlling the quantity of exposure light or the developing time. The inversely taperedpartition walls 2122 may also be formed with the aforementioned light-shielding material so as to further improve the contrast. -
FIG 48 shows a perspective view immediately after forming the plurality ofparallel partition walls 2122 with inversely tapered shapes. Note that common portions toFIGS. 48 and47A to 47C are denoted by common reference numerals. - The height of the inversely tapered
partition walls 2122 is set to be higher than the thickness of a film containing an organic compound and a conductive film. When a film containing an organic compound and a conductive film are stacked over the first substrate having the structure shown inFIG. 48 , they are separated into a plurality of regions which are electrically insulated from each other, thereby light-emitting layers andsecond electrodes 2116 are formed. Thesecond electrodes 2116 are parallel striped electrodes which extend in the direction of crossing thefirst electrodes 2113. Note that the film containing an organic compound and the conductive film are also formed over the inversely taperedpartition walls 2122; however, they are separated from light-emittinglayers second electrodes 2116. - Note that in this embodiment mode, a first light-emitting element R1 of the invention corresponds to the light-emitting
layer 2115R; a third light-emitting element G1 of the invention corresponds to the light-emittinglayer 2115G; and a fifth light-emitting element B1 of the invention corresponds to the light-emittinglayer 2115B. Note also that in this embodiment mode, the second light-emitting element R2 of the invention corresponds to a region below the light-emittinglayer 2115R inFIG. 47A ; the fourth light-emitting element G2 of the invention corresponds to a region below the light-emittinglayer 2115G inFIG 47A ; and the sixth light-emitting element B2 of the invention corresponds to a region below the light-emittinglayer 2115B inFIG 47A . As a method of varying the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 from each other; varying the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 from each other; and varying the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 from each other, either a material or thickness of the respective light-emitting elements may be varied, or color filters or color conversion layers having different transmission properties may be used. In this embodiment mode, description is made of the light-emittinglayers - An example shown herein is a case where the light-emitting
layers layers - Sealing of the light-emitting elements is carried out by attaching a second substrate to the first substrate with a sealant. A protective film for covering the
second electrodes 2116 may also be formed if necessary. Note that the second substrate is preferably a substrate having a high barrier property against moisture. In addition, a drying agent may be disposed in a region surrounded by a sealant if necessary. -
FIG 50 shows a top view of a light-emitting module on which an FPC and the like are mounted after sealing. - Note that a light-emitting device in this specification means an image display device, a light-emitting device, or a light source (including an illuminating device). In addition, a light-emitting device includes a module to which a connector such as an FPC (Flexible Printed Circuit), a TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) tape, or a TCP (Tape Carrier Package) is attached, a module where an end of the TAB tape or the TCP is provided with a printed wiring board, or a module where an IC (Integrated Circuit) is directly mounted on light-emitting elements by COG (Chip On Glass).
- A
first substrate 5001 and asecond substrate 5010 are attached with asealant 5011 so as to face each other. Thesealant 5011 may be a photo-curing resin, and is preferably a material with few degasification and a low hygroscopic property. In addition, in order to keep a constant gap between the substrates, fillers (spacers in stick or fiber forms) or spherical spacers may be added to thesealant 5011. Note that thesecond substrate 5010 is preferably formed of a material having the same thermal expansion coefficient as thefirst substrate 5001, and glass (including quartz glass) or plastic can be used. - In a pixel portion where an image display is performed as shown in
FIG. 50 , column signal lines and row signal lines cross at right angles with each other. - The
first electrode 2113 inFIGS. 47A to 47C corresponds to acolumn signal line 5002 inFIG 5 ; thesecond electrode 2116 inFIGS. 47A to 47C corresponds to arow signal line 5003; and the inversely taperedpartition wall 2122 inFIG. 47C corresponds to apartition wall 5004. A light-emitting layer is sandwiched between thecolumn signal line 5002 and therow signal line 5003, and oneintersection 5005 corresponds to one pixel. - Note that the
row signal line 5003 is electrically connected on its end to a connectingwire 5008, and the connectingwire 5008 is connected to anFPC 5009b through aninput terminal 5007. Thecolumn signal line 5002 is connected to anFPC 5009a through aninput terminal 5006. - In addition, an optical film such as a polarizing plate, a circularly polarizing light plate (including an elliptically polarizing plate), a retardation plate (a λ/4 plate or a λ/2 plate), or a color filter may be provided as appropriate on the light-emission surface. In addition, the polarizing plate or the circularly polarizing plate may be provided with an anti-reflection film. For example, anti-glare treatment may be applied to the polarizing plate or the circularly polarizing plate by forming irregularities on the surface in order to diffuse reflected light and reduce glare. In addition, anti-reflection treatment by thermal treatment may be applied to the polarizing pate or the circularly polarizing plate. After that, hard-coat treatment may be further applied for protection against external shocks. However, when a polarizing plate or a circularly polarizing plate is used, the light extraction efficiency is decreased. In addition, the polarizing plate or the circularly polarizing plate itself is expensive and easily deteriorates.
- In this embodiment mode, stray light from the light-emitting elements is absorbed or shielded by providing black partition walls (also called banks or partitions) which serve as a black matrix (BM) between pixels on the side of the substrate where light-emitting elements are provided, thereby the contrast of a display can be improved.
- Note that this embodiment mode can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- In this embodiment mode, description is made of another structure of a light-emitting element in the invention.
- Although the light-emitting elements described in the aforementioned embodiment modes are mainly organic electroluminescence (EL: Electro Luminescence) elements, the invention is not limited to these.
- For example, it may be a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device), a PDP (Plasma Display Panel), an FED (Field Emission Display), an SED (Surface-conduction Electron-emitter Display) which is one of the FEDs, an electrophoretic display device (electronic paper), or a piezoelectric ceramic display.
- Among the aforementioned light-emitting elements, elements whose colors can be recognized with light traveling therethrough can perform a display through color filters as described in
Embodiment Mode 3. The emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in the first and second pixels are varied from each other; the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 in the third and fourth pixels are varied from each other; and the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 in the fifth and sixth pixels are varied from each other. As a result, when represented by a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram, coordinates on the chromaticity diagram may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in the first and second pixels; between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 in the third and fourth pixels; and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 in the fifth and sixth pixels, respectively. - Among the aforementioned light-emitting elements, elements of a self-luminous type can perform display by converting colors with a fluorescent material and the like. The emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in the first and second pixels are varied from each other; the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 in the third and fourth pixels are varied from each other; and the emission spectrums of the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 in the fifth and sixth pixels are be varied from each other. As a result, when represented by a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram, coordinates on the chromaticity diagram may be varied between the light-emitting elements R1 and R2 in the first and second pixels; between the light-emitting elements G1 and G2 in the third and fourth pixels; and between the light-emitting elements B1 and B2 in the fifth and sixth pixels, respectively.
- Note that this embodiment mode can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- The display device of the invention can be applied to various electronic devices. Specifically, it can be applied to a display portion of an electronic device. Such electronic devices include a video camera, a digital camera, a goggle display, a navigation system, an audio reproducing device (e.g., a car audio, an audio component set, or the like), a computer, a game machine, a portable information terminal (e.g., a mobile computer, a mobile phone, a portable game machine, an electronic book, or the like), an image reproducing device provided with a recording medium (specifically, a device for reproducing a recording medium such as a digital versatile disc (DVD) and having a display for displaying the reproduced image), and the like.
-
FIG. 38A shows a display which includes ahousing 38101, a supportingbase 38102, adisplay portion 38103, and the like. A display device having the pixel configuration of the invention can be used for thedisplay portion 38103. Note that the display includes all of information display devices such as those for personal computers, television broadcast reception, and advertisement display. The display which uses the display device of the invention for thedisplay portion 38103 can express bright colors. - In recent years, need for a high added value of displays has been growing. Accordingly, to reduce the manufacturing cost and to express bright colors are the primary subjects to be addressed.
- For example, by using the pixel configuration in
FIG 2 or the like for a pixel portion of a display panel, a display panel which can express bright colors can be provided. - In addition, by forming the pixel portion and its peripheral driver circuits over the same substrate as shown in
FIG 30A , a display panel with reduced manufacturing cost can be formed. - In addition, by using an amorphous semiconductor (e.g., amorphous silicon (a-Si:H)) for a semiconductor layer of a transistor in a circuit which partially constitutes a pixel portion, a manufacturing process can be simplified and further cost reduction can be achieved. In this case, the driver circuit on the periphery of the pixel portion may be formed in an IC chip so that it is mounted on the display panel by COG or the like as shown in
FIG. 31B andFIG. 32B . In this manner, using an amorphous semiconductor makes it easier to increase the size of a display. -
FIG 38B shows a camera which includes amain body 38201, adisplay portion 38202, animage receiving portion 38203, operatingkeys 38204, an external connectingport 38205, a shutter 38206, and the like. - In recent years, competitive manufacturing of digital cameras has been intensified in accordance with the higher performance. Therefore, to suppress the cost of a high-performance product is the primary subject to be addressed. A digital camera which uses the display device of the invention for the
display portion 38202 can express bright colors. - For example, by forming a signal line driver circuit which operates at a high speed in an IC chip while forming a scan line driver circuit which operates at a relatively low speed on the same substrate as a pixel portion by using transistors of single conductivity type, high performance and cost reduction can be achieved. In addition, by using an amorphous semiconductor, for example amorphous silicon for a semiconductor layer of a transistor used for the scan line driver circuit which is formed over the same substrate as the pixel portion, further cost reduction can be achieved.
-
FIG 38C shows a computer which includes amain body 38301, ahousing 38302, adisplay portion 38303, akeyboard 38304, an external connectingport 38305, apointing device 38306, and the like. A computer which uses the display device of the invention for thedisplay portion 38303 can express bright colors. -
FIG. 38D shows a mobile computer which includes amain body 38401, adisplay portion 38402, aswitch 38403, operatingkeys 38404, aninfrared port 38405, and the like. A mobile computer which uses the display device of the invention for thedisplay portion 38402 can express bright colors. -
FIG. 38E shows a portable image reproducing device provided with a recording medium (specifically, a DVD player), which includes amain body 38501, ahousing 38502, a display portion A38503, a display portion B38504, a recording medium (e.g., DVD) readingportion 38505, operatingkeys 38506, aspeaker portion 38507, and the like. The display portion A38503 can mainly display image data, while the display portion B38504 can mainly display textual data. An image reproducing device which uses the display device of the invention for the display portions A38503 and B38504 can express bright colors. -
FIG 38F shows a goggle display which includes amain body 38601, adisplay portion 38602, anearphone 38603, atemple 38604, and the like. A goggle display which uses the display device of the invention for thedisplay portion 38602 can express bright colors. -
FIG 38G shows a portable game machine which includes ahousing 38701, adisplay portion 38702,speaker portions 38703, operatingkeys 38704, a recordingmedium insert portion 38705, and the like. A portable game machine which uses the display device of the invention for thedisplay portion 38702 can express bright colors. -
FIG. 38H shows a digital camera having a television receiving function, which includes amain body 38801, adisplay portion 38802, operatingkeys 38803, aspeaker 38804, ashutter 38805, animage receiving portion 38806, anantenna 38807, and the like. A digital camera having a television receiving function which uses the display device of the invention for thedisplay portion 38802 can express bright colors. - Such a multi-functional digital camera having a television receiving function is more frequently used for television reception and the like nowadays, and longer operating hours per charge is required.
- For example, low power consumption can be achieved by forming a peripheral driver circuit in an IC chip using a CMOS and the like as shown in
FIG 31B orFIG. 32A . - In this manner, the invention can be applied to various electronic devices.
- Note that this embodiment can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- In this embodiment, description is made of an exemplary structure of a mobile phone which has a display portion formed by using a display device with the pixel configuration of the invention, with reference to
FIG 37 . - A
display panel 3701 is incorporated into ahousing 3730 in a freely attachable/detachable manner. The shape and size of thehousing 3730 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the size of the display panel 3710. Thehousing 3730 to which the display panel 3710 is fixed is fit into a printedwiring board 3731 so as to be assembled as a module. - The
display panel 3701 is connected to the printedwiring board 3731 through anFPC 3713. Aspeaker 3732, amicrophone 3733, a transmission/reception circuit 3734, and asignal processing circuit 3735 including a CPU, a controller, and the like are formed on the printedwiring board 3731. Such a module is combined with an input means 3736 and abattery 3737, and then incorporated intohousings 3739. A pixel portion of thedisplay panel 3701 is disposed so that it can be seen from an open window formed in thehousing 3739. - The
display panel 3701 may be constructed such that a part of peripheral driver circuits (e.g., a driver circuit having a low operating frequency among a plurality of driver circuits) is formed over the same substrate as a pixel portion by using TFTs, while another part of the peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a high operating frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) is formed in an IC chip. Then, the IC chip may be mounted on thedisplay panel 3701 by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to a glass substrate by TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed wiring board. By employing such a structure, power consumption of a display device can be reduced and operating hours per charge of a mobile phone can be lengthened. Further, cost reduction of the mobile phone can be achieved. - In addition, the display device shown in the aforementioned embodiment can be applied to the pixel portion as appropriate.
- For example, in order to further reduce power consumption, a structure as shown in
FIG 31B orFIG. 32A may be used, where a pixel portion is formed over a substrate with TFTs, and all of the peripheral driver circuits are formed in IC chips to be mounted on the display panel by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like. - Note that the structure shown in this embodiment is only an exemplary mobile phone, and therefore, the display device of the invention can be applied to not only the mobile phone with the aforementioned structure but also mobile phones with various structures. In addition, by using the display device of the invention, bright colors can be expressed.
- In this embodiment, description is made of an exemplary structure of an electronic device which has a display portion formed by using a display device with the pixel configuration of the invention, specifically a television receiver having an EL module.
-
FIG. 33 shows an EL module combining adisplay panel 3301 and acircuit board 3311. Thedisplay panel 3301 includes apixel portion 3302, a scanline driver circuit 3303, and a signalline driver circuit 3304. Acontrol circuit 3312, asignal dividing circuit 3313, and the like are formed over thecircuit board 3311, for example. Thedisplay panel 3301 and thecircuit board 3311 are connected with a connectingwire 3314. The connectingwire 3314 can be an FPC or the like. - The
display panel 3301 may be constructed such that a part of peripheral driver circuits (e.g., a driver circuit having a low operating frequency among a plurality of driver circuits) is formed over the same substrate as a pixel portion by using TFTs, while another part of the peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a high operating frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) is formed in an IC chip, so that the IC chip is mounted on thedisplay panel 3301 by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like. Alternatively, the IC chip may be mounted on thedisplay panel 3301 by TAB (Tape Automated Bonding) or a printed wiring board. Note thatFIG. 30A shows an exemplary structure where a part of the peripheral driver circuits is formed over the same substrate as the pixel portion, while another part of the peripheral driver circuits is formed in an IC chip, so that the IC chip is mounted on the substrate by COG or the like. - In addition, the display device shown in the aforementioned embodiment modes can be employed as appropriate.
- For example, in order to reduce power consumption, a pixel portion may be formed over a glass substrate with TFTs, while all of the peripheral driver circuits may be formed in IC chips to be mounted on the display panel by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like.
- With such an EL module, an EL television receiver can be completed.
FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing the main configuration of an EL television receiver. Atuner 3401 receives video signals and audio signals. The video signals are processed by a videosignal amplifier circuit 3402, a videosignal processing circuit 3403 which converts a signal output from the videosignal amplifier circuit 3402 into a color signal corresponding to each color of red, green, and blue, and acontrol circuit 3412 for converting the video signal to be input into a driver circuit. Thecontrol circuit 3412 outputs signals to each of a scanline driver circuit 3410 and a signalline driver circuit 3404. In the case of performing digital drive, asignal dividing circuit 3413 may be provided between thecontrol circuit 3412 and the signalline driver circuit 3404, so that an input digital signal can be divided into m signals before being output to adisplay panel 3411. - Among the signals received at the
tuner 3401, audio signals are transmitted to an audiosignal amplifier circuit 3405, and an output thereof is supplied to aspeaker 3407 through an audiosignal processing circuit 3406. Acontrol circuit 3408 receives control data on a receiving station (reception frequency) or sound volume from aninput portion 3409 and transmits signals to thetuner 3401 as well as the audiosignal processing circuit 3406. -
FIG. 35A shows a television receiver incorporating an EL module of a different mode fromFIG. 34 . InFIG. 35A , adisplay screen 3502 is formed from an EL module. Ahousing 3501 is provided with aspeaker 3503, operatingswitches 3504, and the like as appropriate. -
FIG 35B shows a television receiver having a wireless and portable display. Ahousing 3512 incorporates a battery and a signal receiver, and the battery drives adisplay portion 3513 and aspeaker portion 3517. The battery can be repeatedly charged with abattery charger 3510. In addition, thebattery charger 3510 can transmit/receive video signals, and the video signals from thebattery charger 3510 can be delivered to the signal receiver in the display. Thehousing 3512 is controlled withoperating keys 3516. The device shown inFIG. 35B can also transmit signals from thehousing 3512 to thebattery charger 3510 by operating the operating key 3516; therefore, it can also be called a video/audio two-way communication device. Further, the device can also control communication with another electronic device by operating theoperating keys 3516 such that signals are transmitted from thehousing 3512 to thebattery charger 3510, and another electronic device receives the signals that thebattery charger 3510 can transmit. Therefore, the device can also be called a general-purpose remote control device. The invention can be applied to thedisplay portion 3513. -
FIG. 36A shows a module combining adisplay panel 3601 and a printedwiring board 3602. Thedisplay panel 3601 has apixel portion 3603 where a plurality of pixels are provided, a first scanline driver circuit 3604, a second scanline driver circuit 3605, and a signalline driver circuit 3606 for supplying a video signal to a selected pixel. - The printed
wiring board 3602 is provided with acontroller 3607, a central processing unit (CPU) 3608, amemory 3609, apower supply circuit 3610, anaudio processing circuit 3611, a transmission/reception circuit 3612, and the like. The printedwiring board 3602 and thedisplay panel 3601 are connected through a flexible printed wiring board (FPC) 3613. The printedwiring board 3613 may be provided with a storage capacitor, a buffer circuit, and the like in order to prevent noise interruption on the power supply voltage or signals and also prevent dull signal rising. In addition, thecontroller 3607, theaudio processing circuit 3611, thememory 3609, theCPU 3608, thepower supply circuit 3610, and the like can be mounted on thedisplay panel 3601 by COG (Chip On Glass). By using COG, a scale of the printedwiring board 3602 can be reduced. - Various control signals are input/output through an I/F portion 3614 (interface) provided on the printed
wiring board 3602. In addition, anantenna port 3615 for transmitting/receiving signals to/from an antenna is provided on the printedwiring board 3602. -
FIG. 36B is a block diagram of the module shown inFIG. 36A . This module includes aVRAM 3616, aDRAM 3617, aflash memory 3618, and the like as thememory 3609. TheVRAM 3616 stores image data to be displayed on the panel, theDRAM 3617 stores image data or audio data, and theflash memory 3618 stores various programs. - The
power supply circuit 3610 supplies power to operate thedisplay panel 3601, thecontroller 3607, theCPU 3608, theaudio processing circuit 3611, thememory 3609, and the transmission/reception circuit 3612. Depending on the specification of the panel, thepower supply circuit 3610 may be provided with a current source. - The
CPU 3608 includes a controlsignal generation circuit 3620, adecoder 3621, aregister 3622, anarithmetic circuit 3623, aRAM 3624, aninterface 3619 for theCPU 3608, and the like. Various signals input to theCPU 3608 through theinterface 3619 are once stored in theregister 3622 before being input to thearithmetic circuit 3623, thedecoder 3621, and the like. Thearithmetic circuit 3623 performs operation based on the signals input, and specifies an address for sending various instructions. On the other hand, signals input to thedecoder 3621 are decoded, and then input to the controlsignal generation circuit 3620. The controlsignal generation circuit 3620 generates signals containing various instructions based on the signals input, and transmits the signals to an address specified by thearithmetic circuit 3623, specifically to thememory 3609, the transmission/reception circuit 3612, theaudio processing circuit 3611, thecontroller 3607, and the like. - The
memory 3609, the transmission/reception circuit 3612, theaudio processing circuit 3611, and thecontroller 3607 operate in accordance with the respective instructions received. The operation is briefly described below. - Signals input from an input means 3625 are transmitted to the
CPU 3608 mounted on the printedwiring board 3602 through the I/F portion 3614. The controlsignal generation circuit 3620 converts image data stored in theVRAM 3616 into a predetermined format in accordance with the signals transmitted from the input means 3625 which is a pointing device, a keyboard, or the like, and then transmits the data to thecontroller 3607. - The
controller 3607 processes signals containing image data which are transmitted from theCPU 3608 in accordance with the specification of the panel, and then supplies the data to thedisplay panel 3601. In addition, thecontroller 3607 generates Hsync signals, Vsync signals, clock signals CLK, AC voltage (AC Cont), and switching signals L/R based on the power supply voltage input from thepower supply circuit 3610 and the various signals input from theCPU 3608, and supplies the signals to thedisplay panel 3601. - The transmission/
reception circuit 3612 processes signals which have been transmitted/received as electromagnetic waves at anantenna 3628, and specifically includes high frequency circuits such as an isolator, a bandpass filter, a VCO (Voltage Controlled Oscillator), an LPF (Low Pass Filter), a coupler, and a balun. Among signals transmitted/received to/from the transmission/reception circuit 3612, signals containing audio data are transmitted to theaudio processing circuit 3611 in accordance with the instruction from theCPU 3608. - The signals containing audio data which are transmitted in accordance with the instruction from the
CPU 3608 are demodulated into audio signals in theaudio processing circuit 3611 and then transmitted to aspeaker 3627. Audio signals transmitted from amicrophone 3626 are modulated in theaudio processing circuit 3611, and then transmitted to the transmission/reception circuit 3612 in accordance with the instruction from theCPU 3608. - The
controller 3607, theCPU 3608, thepower supply circuit 3610, theaudio processing circuit 3611, and thememory 3609 can be integrated as a package of this embodiment. - Needless to say, the invention is not limited to a television receiver, and can be used for various applications such as a monitor of a personal computer, an information display board at the train station or airport, or a particularly large display medium such as an advertisement display board on the street. By using the display device of the invention, bright colors can be expressed.
- Note that this embodiment can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- In this embodiment, description is made of application examples of a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion, with reference to the drawings. A display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion can be incorporated in a moving object, a building, or the like.
-
FIGS. 55A and 55B each show a moving object incorporating a display device, as an exemplary display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion.FIG. 55A shows adisplay panel 9702 which is attached to a glass door in atrain car body 9701, as an exemplary moving object incorporating a display device. Thedisplay panel 9702 shown inFIG. 55A which has the display device of the invention as a display portion can easily switch images displayed on the display portion in response to external signals. Therefore, images on the display panel can be periodically switched in accordance with the time cycle through which passengers' ages or sex vary, thereby more efficient advertising effect can be expected. - Note that the position for setting a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is not limited to a glass door of a train car body as shown in
FIG. 55A , and thus a display panel can be applied to anywhere by changing the shape of the display panel.FIG 55B shows an example thereof. -
FIG. 55B shows an interior view of a train car body. InFIG. 55B ,display panels 9703 attached to glass windows and adisplay panel 9704 hung on the ceiling are shown in addition to thedisplay panels 9702 attached to the glass doors shown inFIG. 55A . Thedisplay panels 9703 each having the display device of the invention as a display portion has self-luminous display elements. Therefore, by displaying images for advertisement in rush hours, while displaying no images in off-peak hours, outside views can be seen from the train windows. In addition, thedisplay panel 9704 having the display device of the invention as a display portion can be flexibly bent by providing switching elements such as organic transistors over a substrate in a film form, and images can be displayed on thedisplay panel 9704 by driving self-luminous display elements. - Another example where a display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion is applied to a moving object incorporating a display device is described with reference to
FIG 56 . -
FIG. 56 shows a moving object incorporating a display device, as an exemplary display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion.FIG 56 shows adisplay panel 9901 which is incorporated in abody 9902 of a car, as an exemplary moving object incorporating a display device. Thedisplay panel 9901 having the display device of the invention as a display portion shown inFIG. 56 is incorporated in a body of a car, and displays information on the operation of the car or information input from outside of the car on an on-demand basis. Further, it has a navigation function to a destination of the car. - Note that the position for setting a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is not limited to a front portion of a car body as shown in
FIG 56 , and thus a display panel can be applied to anywhere such as glass windows or doors by changing the shape of the display panel. - Another example where a display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion is applied to a moving object incorporating a display device is described with reference to
FIGS. 57A and 57B . -
FIGS. 57A and 57B each show a moving object incorporating a display device, as an exemplary display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion.FIG. 57A shows adisplay panel 10102 which is incorporated in a part of the ceiling above the passenger's seat inside anairplane body 10101, as an exemplary moving object incorporating a display device. Thedisplay panel 10102 shown inFIG 57A which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is fixed on theairplane body 10101 with ahinge portion 10103, so that passengers can see thedisplay panel 10102 with the help of a telescopic motion of thehinge portion 10103. Thedisplay panel 10102 has a function of displaying information as well as a function of an advertisement or amusement means with the operation of passengers. In addition, by storing thedisplay panel 10102 in theairplane body 10101 by folding thehinge portion 10103 as shown inFIG 57B , safety during the airplane's takeoff and landing can be secured. Note that by lighting display elements of the display panel in an emergency, the display panel can be also utilized as a guide light. - Note that the position for setting a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is not limited to the ceiling of the
airplane body 10101, and thus a display panel can be applied to anywhere such as seats or doors by changing the shape of the display panel. For example, the display panel may be set on the backside of a seat so that a passenger on the rear seat can operate and view the display panel. - Although this embodiment has illustrated a train car body, a car body, and an airplane body as exemplary moving objects, the invention is not limited to these, and can be applied to motorbikes, four-wheeled vehicles (including cars, buses, and the like), trains (including monorails, railroads, and the like), ships and vessels, and the like. By employing a display panel having the display device of the invention, downsizing and power saving of a display panel can be achieved, as well as a moving object having a display medium with an excellent operation can be provided. In addition, since images displayed on a plurality of display panels incorporated in a moving object can be switched all at once, in particular, the invention is quite advantageous to be applied to advertising media for unspecified number of customers, or information display boards in an emergency.
- An example where a display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion is applied to a structure is described with reference to
FIG 58 . -
FIG. 58 illustrates an example where a flexible display panel capable of displaying images is realized by providing switching elements such as organic transistors over a substrate in a film form, and driving self-luminous display elements, as an exemplary display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion. InFIG. 58 , a display panel is provided on a curved surface of an outside columnar object such as a telephone pole as a structure, and specifically, shown here is a structure wheredisplay panels 9802 are attached totelephone poles 9801 which are columnar objects. - The
display panels 9802 shown inFIG 58 are positioned at about a half height of the telephone poles, so as to be higher than the eye level of humans. When the display panels are viewed from a movingobject 9803, images on thedisplay panels 9802 can be recognized. By displaying the same images on thedisplay panels 9802 provided on the telephone poles standing together in large numbers, such as outside telephone poles, viewers can recognize the displayed information or advertisement. Thedisplay panels 9802 provided on thetelephone poles 9801 inFIG. 58 can easily display the same images by using external signals; therefore, quite effective information display and advertising effects can be expected. In addition, since self-luminous display elements are provided as display elements in the display panel of the invention, it can be effectively used as a highly visible display medium even at night. - Another example where a display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion is applied to a structure is described with reference to
FIG. 59 , which differs fromFIG. 58 . -
FIG. 59 shows another application example of a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion. InFIG. 59 , an example of adisplay panel 10001 which is incorporated in the sidewall of aprefabricated bath unit 10002 is shown. Thedisplay panel 10001 shown inFIG 59 which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is incorporated in theprefabricated bath unit 10002, so that a bather can view thedisplay panel 10001. Thedisplay panel 10001 has a function of displaying information as well as a function of an advertisement or amusement means with the operation of a bather. - The position for setting a display panel which has the display device of the invention as a display portion is not limited to the sidewall of the
prefabricated bath unit 10002 shown inFIG 59 , and thus a display panel can be applied to anywhere by changing the shape of the display panel, such that it can be incorporated in a part of a mirror or a bathtub. -
FIG. 60 shows an example where a television set having a large display portion is provided in a building.FIG. 60 includes ahousing 8010, adisplay portion 8011, aremote controlling device 8012 which is an operating portion, aspeaker portion 8013, and the like. A display panel having the display device of the invention as a display portion is applied to the manufacturing of thedisplay portion 8011. The television set inFIG. 60 is incorporated in a building as a wall-hanging television set, and can be set without requiring a large space. - Although this embodiment has illustrated a telephone pole, a prefabricated bath unit, an inner side of a building, and the like as exemplary structures, this embodiment is not limited to these, and can be applied to any structures which can incorporate a display device. By using the display device of the invention for a display panel, a structure having a display medium which can express bright colors can be provided.
- Note that this embodiment can be freely combined with the other embodiment modes or embodiments in this specification.
- The present application is based on Japanese Priority application No.
2005-288373 filed on September 30, 2005
Claims (8)
- A display device comprising:a display region comprising a plurality of picture elements (1900), wherein each of the plurality of picture elements (1900) has pixels (1901, 1902, 1903, 1904, 1905, 1906, 1907), each pixel having a color element including a light-emitting element (303), and each of the plurality of picture elements (1900) comprises:a first pixel (1901) and a second pixel (1904) each comprising a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate in a CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.50 or more;a third pixel (1902) and a fourth pixel (1905) each comprising a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram is 0.55 or more; anda fifth pixel (1903) and a sixth pixel (1906) each comprising a light-emitting element, the light-emitting element having a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.20 or less and 0.25 or less, respectively;wherein the light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel (1901) and the second pixel (1904) have different emission spectrums from each other;wherein the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel (1902) and the fourth pixel (1905) have different emission spectrums from each other; andwherein the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel (1903) and the sixth pixel (1906) have different emission spectrums from each other, andcharacterized in thatthe each picture element (1900) includes a light-emitting element (1907) which emits white light, andthe first pixel (1901) and the second pixel (1904) have light-emitting regions with different area dimensions from each other;the third pixel (1902) and the fourth pixel (1905) have light-emitting regions with different area dimensions from each other; andthe fifth pixel (1903) and the sixth pixel (1906) have light-emitting regions with different area dimensions from each other.
- The display device according to claim 1,
wherein the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel (1901) and the second pixel (1904) vary such that the light-emitting elements have colors of different coordinates from each other in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram;
wherein the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel (1902) and the fourth pixel (1905) vary such that the light-emitting elements have colors of different coordinates from each other in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram; and
wherein the emission spectrums of light emitted from the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel (1903) and the sixth pixel (1906) vary such that the light-emitting elements have colors of different coordinates from each other in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram. - The display device according to claim 1 or 2,:wherein the light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel (1901) and the second pixel (1904) are formed of different materials from each other to have different emission spectrums;wherein the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel (1902) and the fourth pixel (1905) are formed of different materials from each other to have different emission spectrums; andwherein the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel (1903) and the sixth pixel (1906) are formed of different materials from each other to have different emission spectrums.
- The display device according to claim 1 or 2,:wherein the light-emitting elements provided in the first pixel (1901) and the second pixel (1904) are formed to have different thickness from each other to have different emission spectrums;wherein the light-emitting elements provided in the third pixel (1902) and the fourth pixel (1905) are formed to have different thickness from each other to have different emission spectrums; andwherein the light-emitting elements provided in the fifth pixel (1903) and the sixth pixel (1906) are formed to have different thickness from each other to have different emission spectrums.
- The display device according to claim 1 or 2,:wherein the first pixel (1901) and the second pixel (1904) have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, and transmit light with different emission spectrums;wherein the third pixel (1902) and the fourth pixel (1905) have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, and transmit light with different emission spectrums; andwherein the fifth pixel (1903) and the sixth pixel (1906) have color filters with different transmission properties from each other, and transmit light with different emission spectrums.
- The display device according to one of claims 1 - 5,
wherein one of the light-emitting element provided in the first pixel (1901) or the light-emitting element provided in the second pixel (1904) has a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.6 or more and 0.35 or less, respectively; wherein either one of the light-emitting element provided in the third pixel (1902) or the light-emitting element provided in the fourth pixel (1905) has a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.3 or less and 0.6 or more, respectively; and
wherein either one of the light-emitting element provided in the fifth pixel (1903) or the light-emitting element provided in the sixth pixel (1906) has a chromaticity whose x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the CIE-XY chromaticity diagram are 0.15 or less and 0.2 or less, respectively. - The display device according to claim 1 - 5, wherein the each light-emitting element (303) is an electroluminescence element.
- Use of the display device according to one of claims 1 - 5 in an electronic device selected from the group consisting of a video camera, a digital camera, a goggle display, a navigation system, an audio reproducing device, a computer, a game machine, a mobile computer, a mobile phone, a portable game machine, an electronic book, and a digital versatile disc.
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2005288373 | 2005-09-30 |
Publications (3)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
EP1770676A2 EP1770676A2 (en) | 2007-04-04 |
EP1770676A3 EP1770676A3 (en) | 2011-12-14 |
EP1770676B1 true EP1770676B1 (en) | 2017-05-03 |
Family
ID=37734792
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP06019181.4A Not-in-force EP1770676B1 (en) | 2005-09-30 | 2006-09-13 | Display device and electronic device |
Country Status (6)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (11) | US7982385B2 (en) |
EP (1) | EP1770676B1 (en) |
JP (2) | JP5651620B2 (en) |
KR (2) | KR20070037351A (en) |
CN (1) | CN1941029B (en) |
TW (3) | TWI556200B (en) |
Families Citing this family (123)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8269227B2 (en) | 2005-06-09 | 2012-09-18 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device and electronic device |
US8729795B2 (en) | 2005-06-30 | 2014-05-20 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device and electronic device |
US20070001954A1 (en) * | 2005-07-04 | 2007-01-04 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and driving method of display device |
EP1770676B1 (en) * | 2005-09-30 | 2017-05-03 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and electronic device |
TW200826055A (en) * | 2006-12-06 | 2008-06-16 | Gigno Technology Co Ltd | Display apparatus and manufacturing method thereof |
JP2009044225A (en) * | 2007-08-06 | 2009-02-26 | Nec Saitama Ltd | Portable terminal |
TWI384277B (en) * | 2007-09-07 | 2013-02-01 | Japan Display West Inc | Liquid crystal display apparatus |
KR20090046310A (en) * | 2007-11-05 | 2009-05-11 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display system, display apparatus and control method thereof |
JP5262217B2 (en) | 2008-03-24 | 2013-08-14 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Voltage selection circuit, electrophoretic display device, and electronic device |
FR2931296B1 (en) * | 2008-05-13 | 2013-04-26 | Commissariat Energie Atomique | CONTROL CIRCUIT OF A PIXEL WITH VARIABLE CHROMATIC COORDINATES |
WO2010036364A1 (en) * | 2008-09-24 | 2010-04-01 | Luminus Devices, Inc. | Light-emitting device including independently electrically addressable sections |
US9385167B2 (en) * | 2008-10-01 | 2016-07-05 | Universal Display Corporation | OLED display architecture |
US20100225252A1 (en) * | 2008-10-01 | 2010-09-09 | Universal Display Corporation | Novel amoled display architecture |
JP5187124B2 (en) * | 2008-10-16 | 2013-04-24 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Liquid material discharge method, color filter manufacturing method, and organic EL device manufacturing method |
JP2010104861A (en) * | 2008-10-28 | 2010-05-13 | Seiko Epson Corp | Method of ejecting liquid material, method of manufacturing color filter and method of manufacturing organic el device |
DE102008054435A1 (en) * | 2008-12-09 | 2010-06-10 | Universität Zu Köln | Organic light emitting diode with optical resonator and manufacturing method |
US8461582B2 (en) | 2009-03-05 | 2013-06-11 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Semiconductor device and method for manufacturing the same |
TWI416530B (en) * | 2009-03-25 | 2013-11-21 | Wintek Corp | Shift register |
KR101127859B1 (en) * | 2009-05-27 | 2012-03-22 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Monochrome light emitting display device and method for driving the same |
US8264548B2 (en) * | 2009-06-23 | 2012-09-11 | Sony Corporation | Steering mirror for TV receiving high frequency wireless video |
US20100327304A1 (en) * | 2009-06-30 | 2010-12-30 | Shinichiro Sonoda | Organic el device and design method thereof |
KR101073544B1 (en) * | 2009-08-21 | 2011-10-14 | 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 | Mask and method for fabricating thereof |
US9805641B2 (en) * | 2009-09-04 | 2017-10-31 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and electronic device including the same |
KR101801956B1 (en) | 2009-09-16 | 2017-11-27 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Light-emitting device and manufacturing method thereof |
CN102598280B (en) | 2009-10-21 | 2016-05-18 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Liquid crystal display device and comprise the electronic equipment of this liquid crystal display device |
US8803417B2 (en) * | 2009-12-01 | 2014-08-12 | Ignis Innovation Inc. | High resolution pixel architecture |
KR20110061916A (en) * | 2009-12-02 | 2011-06-10 | 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 | Top-emitting organic light emitting device |
US8330152B2 (en) * | 2009-12-02 | 2012-12-11 | Universal Display Corporation | OLED display architecture with improved aperture ratio |
TWI525377B (en) | 2010-01-24 | 2016-03-11 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Display device |
WO2011089844A1 (en) | 2010-01-24 | 2011-07-28 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and manufacturing method thereof |
US8334545B2 (en) * | 2010-03-24 | 2012-12-18 | Universal Display Corporation | OLED display architecture |
JP5852793B2 (en) | 2010-05-21 | 2016-02-03 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Method for manufacturing liquid crystal display device |
JP2012003925A (en) * | 2010-06-16 | 2012-01-05 | Sony Corp | Display device |
KR101211370B1 (en) * | 2011-01-06 | 2012-12-13 | 주식회사 토비스 | Curved display device |
US8953120B2 (en) * | 2011-01-07 | 2015-02-10 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device |
JP5778961B2 (en) * | 2011-03-29 | 2015-09-16 | 株式会社Joled | Display device and electronic device |
KR101933952B1 (en) * | 2011-07-01 | 2018-12-31 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Light-emitting device, electronic device, and lighting device |
WO2013018136A1 (en) | 2011-08-03 | 2013-02-07 | パナソニック株式会社 | Display panel and production method for same |
TWI464872B (en) * | 2011-08-26 | 2014-12-11 | Au Optronics Corp | Mirror electroluminescent display panel |
TWI484626B (en) * | 2012-02-21 | 2015-05-11 | Formosa Epitaxy Inc | Semiconductor light-emitting component and light-emitting device having same |
JP6111455B2 (en) * | 2012-03-12 | 2017-04-12 | 株式会社Joled | Display panel, display device and electronic device |
TWI650580B (en) * | 2012-05-09 | 2019-02-11 | 日商半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Display device and electronic device |
JP2013253023A (en) * | 2012-06-05 | 2013-12-19 | Canon Inc | New benzopyrene compound and organic light-emitting element having the same |
US20140070169A1 (en) * | 2012-09-12 | 2014-03-13 | Chongwu Zhou | Separated Carbon Nanotube-Based Active Matrix Organic Light-Emitting Diode Displays |
KR102012980B1 (en) * | 2012-09-13 | 2019-08-29 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic light emitting display device with improved color porperty |
JP6076683B2 (en) | 2012-10-17 | 2017-02-08 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Light emitting device |
JP6204012B2 (en) | 2012-10-17 | 2017-09-27 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Light emitting device |
JP6155020B2 (en) | 2012-12-21 | 2017-06-28 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Light emitting device and manufacturing method thereof |
KR20140089879A (en) * | 2013-01-08 | 2014-07-16 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Liquid crystal display apparatus |
US10580832B2 (en) | 2013-01-18 | 2020-03-03 | Universal Display Corporation | High resolution low power consumption OLED display with extended lifetime |
US10229956B2 (en) | 2013-01-18 | 2019-03-12 | Universal Display Corporation | High resolution low power consumption OLED display with extended lifetime |
US9590017B2 (en) | 2013-01-18 | 2017-03-07 | Universal Display Corporation | High resolution low power consumption OLED display with extended lifetime |
US10243023B2 (en) * | 2013-01-18 | 2019-03-26 | Universal Display Corporation | Top emission AMOLED displays using two emissive layers |
US10304906B2 (en) | 2013-01-18 | 2019-05-28 | Universal Display Corporation | High resolution low power consumption OLED display with extended lifetime |
JP6216125B2 (en) | 2013-02-12 | 2017-10-18 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Light emitting device |
US9544997B2 (en) * | 2013-03-01 | 2017-01-10 | Panasonic Corporation | Multi-layered film, electronic device, and manufacturing methods thereof |
JP6104649B2 (en) | 2013-03-08 | 2017-03-29 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Light emitting device |
US9083359B2 (en) * | 2013-03-27 | 2015-07-14 | Mediatek Singapore Pte. Ltd. | Lock detector based on charge pump |
WO2015056582A1 (en) * | 2013-10-16 | 2015-04-23 | 旭硝子株式会社 | Electricity-supplying structure, resin plate for window provided with said structure, and method for manufacturing resin plate for window provided with electricity-supplying structure |
KR102211965B1 (en) * | 2013-10-18 | 2021-02-05 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic light emitting display device |
TW201517260A (en) * | 2013-10-21 | 2015-05-01 | Chunghwa Picture Tubes Ltd | Active matrix organic light emitting diode pixel |
KR102066139B1 (en) * | 2013-11-21 | 2020-01-14 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic light emitting display panel and organic light emitting display device including the same |
CN103698832B (en) * | 2013-12-17 | 2017-01-25 | 合肥京东方光电科技有限公司 | Color filter, manufacturing method thereof, and display device |
CN103715227A (en) * | 2013-12-26 | 2014-04-09 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display panel, driving method of display panel and display device |
KR102145466B1 (en) * | 2013-12-30 | 2020-08-19 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Liquid crystal display panel |
KR102184677B1 (en) * | 2014-01-13 | 2020-12-01 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic light-emitting display apparatus |
CN103779388B (en) * | 2014-01-17 | 2016-04-06 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of organic elctroluminescent device, its driving method and display unit |
CN103887261B (en) * | 2014-03-03 | 2016-08-31 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of flexible display and preparation method thereof |
KR102234840B1 (en) | 2014-03-14 | 2021-04-01 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Analog arithmetic circuit, semiconductor device, and electronic device |
WO2015170614A1 (en) * | 2014-05-07 | 2015-11-12 | ソニー株式会社 | Display device and electronic apparatus |
US10700134B2 (en) | 2014-05-27 | 2020-06-30 | Universal Display Corporation | Low power consumption OLED display |
CN113299711B (en) * | 2014-05-27 | 2024-07-26 | 环球展览公司 | High resolution low power OLED display with extended lifetime |
WO2015181678A1 (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2015-12-03 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light-emitting device, display device, and electronic device |
US9936560B2 (en) * | 2014-06-26 | 2018-04-03 | Nec Lighting, Ltd. | Organic EL panel control device, light source device, organic EL panel control method, program, and recording medium |
TWI643004B (en) * | 2014-08-06 | 2018-12-01 | 友達光電股份有限公司 | Pixel array and head up display |
TWI571675B (en) * | 2014-08-06 | 2017-02-21 | 友達光電股份有限公司 | Pixel array and head up display |
US9933812B2 (en) * | 2014-09-05 | 2018-04-03 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display panel, input/output device, and data processor |
CN104377229B (en) * | 2014-09-30 | 2017-07-11 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Array base palte, display device |
US9379166B2 (en) * | 2014-11-04 | 2016-06-28 | Atom Nanoelectronics, Inc. | Active matrix light emitting diodes display module with carbon nanotubes control circuits and methods of fabrication |
KR102311911B1 (en) * | 2014-11-25 | 2021-10-13 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic Light Emitting Device and Organic Light Emitting Display Device using the same |
US9425233B2 (en) * | 2014-12-22 | 2016-08-23 | Google Inc. | RGBZ pixel cell unit for an RGBZ image sensor |
US9871065B2 (en) * | 2014-12-22 | 2018-01-16 | Google Inc. | RGBZ pixel unit cell with first and second Z transfer gates |
KR102337889B1 (en) * | 2015-02-16 | 2021-12-10 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device |
CN107408364B (en) * | 2015-03-20 | 2020-06-30 | 索尼半导体解决方案公司 | Display device, lighting device, light-emitting element, and semiconductor device |
CN104932137B (en) | 2015-07-03 | 2018-06-05 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of color membrane substrates, array substrate, display panel and display device |
US9818804B2 (en) | 2015-09-18 | 2017-11-14 | Universal Display Corporation | Hybrid display |
US10263050B2 (en) | 2015-09-18 | 2019-04-16 | Universal Display Corporation | Hybrid display |
US20170139128A1 (en) * | 2015-11-16 | 2017-05-18 | Changhong Research Labs, Inc. | Pixel output coupler for a laser display system |
KR102596367B1 (en) * | 2015-12-14 | 2023-10-30 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic light emitting display device |
KR20170084736A (en) * | 2016-01-12 | 2017-07-21 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display apparatus |
JP6731748B2 (en) * | 2016-02-26 | 2020-07-29 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device |
WO2017146477A1 (en) | 2016-02-26 | 2017-08-31 | 서울반도체주식회사 | Display apparatus and method for producing same |
FR3051053B1 (en) * | 2016-05-03 | 2018-05-25 | Essilor International | TRANSPARENT ACTIVE MATRIX WITH DESORDONNE NETWORK AND OPTICAL COMPONENT INTEGRATING SUCH A MATRIX |
CN106097898B (en) * | 2016-06-01 | 2019-12-06 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Pixel array, display substrate and display device |
TWI570687B (en) * | 2016-06-02 | 2017-02-11 | 友達光電股份有限公司 | Method of driving a display and display |
TWI746394B (en) | 2016-08-17 | 2021-11-11 | 日商半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Display device, electronic device and portable information terminal |
KR101857868B1 (en) | 2016-08-26 | 2018-06-21 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Display Device |
WO2018070666A1 (en) * | 2016-10-11 | 2018-04-19 | 주식회사 루멘스 | Led display module and manufacturing method therefor |
CN108155207B (en) * | 2016-12-05 | 2020-08-28 | 群创光电股份有限公司 | Display device |
KR102666206B1 (en) * | 2016-12-22 | 2024-05-14 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device having a color filter |
JP2018116829A (en) * | 2017-01-18 | 2018-07-26 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device |
JP6302610B1 (en) * | 2017-04-14 | 2018-03-28 | 堺ディスプレイプロダクト株式会社 | Awning device |
KR102502221B1 (en) * | 2017-08-08 | 2023-02-21 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Color conversion element and display device comprising the same |
TWI624821B (en) | 2017-09-07 | 2018-05-21 | 錼創科技股份有限公司 | Micro light emitting diode display panel and driving method thereof |
KR102444611B1 (en) * | 2017-12-07 | 2022-09-19 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device |
CN107831612B (en) * | 2017-12-15 | 2020-01-07 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display panel, display device and display method |
CN111465974B (en) * | 2017-12-22 | 2021-09-17 | 堺显示器制品株式会社 | Display device and method for manufacturing display device |
WO2019155320A1 (en) * | 2018-02-09 | 2019-08-15 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Driving method for display device |
CN108511488A (en) * | 2018-03-01 | 2018-09-07 | 云谷(固安)科技有限公司 | The driving method of display panel and display device and display panel |
CN108649131B (en) * | 2018-05-11 | 2020-11-27 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Electroluminescent device, preparation method thereof, display panel and display device |
KR20210011411A (en) | 2018-05-18 | 2021-02-01 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Light-emitting elements, light-emitting devices, electronic devices, and lighting devices |
US10797112B2 (en) | 2018-07-25 | 2020-10-06 | Universal Display Corporation | Energy efficient OLED TV |
CN109118956B (en) * | 2018-08-24 | 2021-01-26 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Transparent display panel, display device and manufacturing method of transparent display panel |
KR102604312B1 (en) * | 2018-09-11 | 2023-11-20 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Organic Light Emitting Display Device |
US10490164B2 (en) * | 2018-10-10 | 2019-11-26 | Intel Corporation | Stretchable display with fixed pixel density |
US11030940B2 (en) | 2019-05-03 | 2021-06-08 | X Development Llc | Display array with distributed audio |
KR20210016222A (en) | 2019-08-02 | 2021-02-15 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Light control film and display device comprising the same |
JP7360272B2 (en) * | 2019-08-19 | 2023-10-12 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | display device |
US11100892B2 (en) * | 2019-12-05 | 2021-08-24 | Rockwell Collins, Inc. | Display element, system, and method |
JP7329080B2 (en) | 2020-01-27 | 2023-08-17 | シャープ株式会社 | Display device |
CN115472111A (en) * | 2021-06-10 | 2022-12-13 | 隆达电子股份有限公司 | Display device and driving method thereof |
US20230011754A1 (en) * | 2021-07-01 | 2023-01-12 | Universal Display Corporation | Means to Reduce OLED Transient Response |
JP2023022709A (en) * | 2021-08-03 | 2023-02-15 | キヤノン株式会社 | Light emission device, control method for the same, photoelectric conversion device, electronic apparatus, illumination device and movable body |
Family Cites Families (72)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4800375A (en) | 1986-10-24 | 1989-01-24 | Honeywell Inc. | Four color repetitive sequence matrix array for flat panel displays |
US5168333A (en) * | 1987-02-26 | 1992-12-01 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Conductivity-modulation metal oxide semiconductor field effect transistor |
US5294869A (en) * | 1991-12-30 | 1994-03-15 | Eastman Kodak Company | Organic electroluminescent multicolor image display device |
JPH06260287A (en) * | 1993-03-04 | 1994-09-16 | Toshiba Lighting & Technol Corp | Light color variable type lighting system |
JP2797883B2 (en) | 1993-03-18 | 1998-09-17 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Multicolor light emitting device and its substrate |
JP3276930B2 (en) * | 1998-11-17 | 2002-04-22 | 科学技術振興事業団 | Transistor and semiconductor device |
JP2000206486A (en) * | 1999-01-11 | 2000-07-28 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Color liquid crystal display |
JP3670923B2 (en) | 1999-02-26 | 2005-07-13 | 三洋電機株式会社 | Color organic EL display device |
US6366025B1 (en) | 1999-02-26 | 2002-04-02 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Electroluminescence display apparatus |
US6842170B1 (en) * | 1999-03-17 | 2005-01-11 | Motorola, Inc. | Display with aligned optical shutter and backlight cells applicable for use with a touchscreen |
US7288420B1 (en) * | 1999-06-04 | 2007-10-30 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Method for manufacturing an electro-optical device |
KR20010050711A (en) | 1999-09-29 | 2001-06-15 | 준지 키도 | Organic electroluminescent device, group of organic electroluminescent devices and controlling method of emission spectrum in such devices |
JP4824848B2 (en) | 2000-02-29 | 2011-11-30 | 淳二 城戸 | Organic electroluminescent device, organic electroluminescent device group, and method for identifying emission spectrum thereof |
JP2001110574A (en) | 1999-10-06 | 2001-04-20 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Electrode for light emitting element |
JP4174989B2 (en) | 1999-11-22 | 2008-11-05 | ソニー株式会社 | Display device |
JP2001244259A (en) | 2000-02-29 | 2001-09-07 | Seiko Epson Corp | Method of manufacturing insulating thin film |
US6870523B1 (en) | 2000-06-07 | 2005-03-22 | Genoa Color Technologies | Device, system and method for electronic true color display |
CN1941920A (en) | 2000-06-07 | 2007-04-04 | 格诺色彩技术有限公司 | Device, system and method for electronic true color display |
US7274383B1 (en) | 2000-07-28 | 2007-09-25 | Clairvoyante, Inc | Arrangement of color pixels for full color imaging devices with simplified addressing |
US6950115B2 (en) | 2001-05-09 | 2005-09-27 | Clairvoyante, Inc. | Color flat panel display sub-pixel arrangements and layouts |
JP2002098948A (en) | 2000-09-20 | 2002-04-05 | Hitachi Ltd | Method for manufacturing liquid crystal display device |
JP2002299067A (en) | 2001-04-03 | 2002-10-11 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Element and illumination device using the same |
US7184066B2 (en) | 2001-05-09 | 2007-02-27 | Clairvoyante, Inc | Methods and systems for sub-pixel rendering with adaptive filtering |
US7307646B2 (en) | 2001-05-09 | 2007-12-11 | Clairvoyante, Inc | Color display pixel arrangements and addressing means |
US7123277B2 (en) | 2001-05-09 | 2006-10-17 | Clairvoyante, Inc. | Conversion of a sub-pixel format data to another sub-pixel data format |
JP2003077663A (en) | 2001-09-03 | 2003-03-14 | Pioneer Electronic Corp | Capacitive light emitting element panel |
JP3840940B2 (en) * | 2001-09-28 | 2006-11-01 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Image display device |
JP2003108020A (en) | 2001-10-01 | 2003-04-11 | Sharp Corp | Picture display device |
US6810919B2 (en) | 2002-01-11 | 2004-11-02 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Manufacturing method for display device, display device, manufacturing method for electronic apparatus, and electronic apparatus |
JP2003249174A (en) | 2002-02-26 | 2003-09-05 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Plasma display device |
KR20030086166A (en) | 2002-05-03 | 2003-11-07 | 엘지.필립스 엘시디 주식회사 | The organic electro-luminescence device and method for fabricating of the same |
US20050030268A1 (en) * | 2002-08-27 | 2005-02-10 | Weixiao Zhang | Full-color electronic device with separate power supply lines |
JP4164563B2 (en) | 2002-09-24 | 2008-10-15 | 独立行政法人科学技術振興機構 | Oxide semiconductor PN junction device and manufacturing method thereof |
US7067843B2 (en) * | 2002-10-11 | 2006-06-27 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Transparent oxide semiconductor thin film transistors |
US20040080479A1 (en) * | 2002-10-22 | 2004-04-29 | Credelle Thomas Lioyd | Sub-pixel arrangements for striped displays and methods and systems for sub-pixel rendering same |
US7230594B2 (en) | 2002-12-16 | 2007-06-12 | Eastman Kodak Company | Color OLED display with improved power efficiency |
KR101179155B1 (en) | 2002-12-27 | 2012-09-07 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Display device |
KR100732106B1 (en) | 2003-01-22 | 2007-06-27 | 도시바 마쯔시따 디스플레이 테크놀로지 컴퍼니, 리미티드 | Organic el display and active matrix substrate |
JP2004317726A (en) | 2003-04-15 | 2004-11-11 | Seiko Epson Corp | Electrooptical device and electronic equipment using the same |
US7397455B2 (en) * | 2003-06-06 | 2008-07-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Liquid crystal display backplane layouts and addressing for non-standard subpixel arrangements |
JP2005062833A (en) | 2003-07-29 | 2005-03-10 | Seiko Epson Corp | Color filter, color image display device, and electronic equipment |
JP4538649B2 (en) * | 2003-08-28 | 2010-09-08 | 奇美電子股▲ふん▼有限公司 | Organic EL display that eliminates uneven brightness and manufacturing method thereof |
US7291967B2 (en) * | 2003-08-29 | 2007-11-06 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting element including a barrier layer and a manufacturing method thereof |
US20050093435A1 (en) * | 2003-09-22 | 2005-05-05 | Suh Min-Chul | Full color organic light-emtting device having color modulation layer |
KR20060089723A (en) | 2003-09-30 | 2006-08-09 | 코닌클리케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. | Multiple primary color display system and method of display using multiple primary colors |
TWI263184B (en) | 2003-09-30 | 2006-10-01 | Sanyo Electric Co | Electroluminescence display device |
US20050116615A1 (en) | 2003-09-30 | 2005-06-02 | Shoichiro Matsumoto | Light emissive display device |
JP4180018B2 (en) | 2003-11-07 | 2008-11-12 | 三洋電機株式会社 | Pixel circuit and display device |
KR100741961B1 (en) | 2003-11-25 | 2007-07-23 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Pixel circuit in flat panel display device and Driving method thereof |
JP2005156925A (en) | 2003-11-26 | 2005-06-16 | Hitachi Displays Ltd | Display device |
US7439667B2 (en) | 2003-12-12 | 2008-10-21 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device with specific four color arrangement |
JP4712366B2 (en) | 2003-12-12 | 2011-06-29 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Light emitting device |
JP4439260B2 (en) * | 2003-12-26 | 2010-03-24 | 三洋電機株式会社 | Manufacturing method of display device |
KR101013631B1 (en) | 2003-12-30 | 2011-02-10 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Apparatus and method for driving liquid crystal display device |
JP4712397B2 (en) * | 2004-01-14 | 2011-06-29 | 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 | Display device |
US7453426B2 (en) | 2004-01-14 | 2008-11-18 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and electronic apparatus |
US7446742B2 (en) * | 2004-01-30 | 2008-11-04 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Light emitting device |
US7030554B2 (en) * | 2004-02-06 | 2006-04-18 | Eastman Kodak Company | Full-color organic display having improved blue emission |
JP2005234037A (en) | 2004-02-17 | 2005-09-02 | Seiko Epson Corp | Electrooptical apparatus, driving circuit and driving method for same, and electronic apparatus |
JP2005300972A (en) * | 2004-04-13 | 2005-10-27 | Seiko Epson Corp | Method for manufacturing display device and substrate sticking device |
US8378930B2 (en) * | 2004-05-28 | 2013-02-19 | Sony Corporation | Pixel circuit and display device having symmetric pixel circuits and shared voltage lines |
US7515122B2 (en) * | 2004-06-02 | 2009-04-07 | Eastman Kodak Company | Color display device with enhanced pixel pattern |
US7944423B2 (en) | 2004-07-01 | 2011-05-17 | Sony Corporation | Image processing unit with black-and-white line segment pattern detection, image processing method, image display device using such image processing unit, and electronic apparatus using such image display device |
JP4507936B2 (en) | 2005-03-24 | 2010-07-21 | エプソンイメージングデバイス株式会社 | Image display device and electronic apparatus |
US20060170712A1 (en) * | 2005-02-01 | 2006-08-03 | Eastman Kodak Company | Color display device with enhanced pixel pattern |
JP4684046B2 (en) * | 2005-03-30 | 2011-05-18 | 三洋電機株式会社 | Display device |
EP1770676B1 (en) * | 2005-09-30 | 2017-05-03 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and electronic device |
GB2437113B (en) * | 2006-04-12 | 2008-11-26 | Cambridge Display Tech Ltd | Light-emissive display and method of manufacturing the same |
US8466856B2 (en) * | 2011-02-22 | 2013-06-18 | Global Oled Technology Llc | OLED display with reduced power consumption |
CN106023818B (en) * | 2016-05-18 | 2019-09-17 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of driving method of dot structure, display panel and dot structure |
TWI746394B (en) * | 2016-08-17 | 2021-11-11 | 日商半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Display device, electronic device and portable information terminal |
US10797112B2 (en) * | 2018-07-25 | 2020-10-06 | Universal Display Corporation | Energy efficient OLED TV |
-
2006
- 2006-09-13 EP EP06019181.4A patent/EP1770676B1/en not_active Not-in-force
- 2006-09-14 TW TW104124727A patent/TWI556200B/en active
- 2006-09-14 TW TW102132558A patent/TWI503805B/en active
- 2006-09-14 TW TW095134046A patent/TWI416446B/en active
- 2006-09-26 US US11/527,125 patent/US7982385B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2006-09-28 KR KR1020060094536A patent/KR20070037351A/en active Search and Examination
- 2006-09-30 CN CN2006101412790A patent/CN1941029B/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2011
- 2011-07-13 US US13/182,167 patent/US8278817B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2012
- 2012-03-01 JP JP2012045090A patent/JP5651620B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2012-09-12 US US13/612,351 patent/US8629612B2/en active Active
-
2013
- 2013-08-08 US US13/962,671 patent/US9099374B2/en active Active
-
2014
- 2014-01-09 JP JP2014002344A patent/JP5752283B2/en active Active
- 2014-03-13 KR KR1020140029589A patent/KR101547166B1/en active IP Right Grant
-
2015
- 2015-07-31 US US14/815,329 patent/US9887236B2/en active Active
-
2018
- 2018-01-30 US US15/883,430 patent/US10043849B2/en active Active
- 2018-07-30 US US16/048,754 patent/US10790329B2/en active Active
-
2020
- 2020-09-15 US US17/021,177 patent/US11211424B2/en active Active
-
2021
- 2021-12-20 US US17/555,838 patent/US11676990B2/en active Active
-
2023
- 2023-05-11 US US18/196,156 patent/US11996436B2/en active Active
-
2024
- 2024-05-22 US US18/671,295 patent/US20240313035A1/en active Pending
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US11211424B2 (en) | Display device and electronic device | |
KR101378805B1 (en) | Display device | |
JP2007122033A (en) | Display device and electronic device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
PUAI | Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012 |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: A2 Designated state(s): AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR |
|
AX | Request for extension of the european patent |
Extension state: AL BA HR MK YU |
|
PUAL | Search report despatched |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009013 |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: A3 Designated state(s): AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR |
|
AX | Request for extension of the european patent |
Extension state: AL BA HR MK RS |
|
RIC1 | Information provided on ipc code assigned before grant |
Ipc: G09G 3/00 20060101AFI20111107BHEP Ipc: H01L 27/32 20060101ALI20111107BHEP |
|
RIC1 | Information provided on ipc code assigned before grant |
Ipc: H01L 27/32 20060101ALI20111116BHEP Ipc: G09G 3/00 20060101AFI20111116BHEP |
|
17P | Request for examination filed |
Effective date: 20120531 |
|
AKX | Designation fees paid |
Designated state(s): DE FI FR GB NL |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R079 Ref document number: 602006052413 Country of ref document: DE Free format text: PREVIOUS MAIN CLASS: G09G0003000000 Ipc: G09G0003200000 |
|
GRAP | Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1 |
|
RIC1 | Information provided on ipc code assigned before grant |
Ipc: G09G 3/20 20060101AFI20161121BHEP Ipc: G09G 3/3208 20160101ALI20161121BHEP Ipc: H01L 27/32 20060101ALI20161121BHEP Ipc: H01L 27/15 20060101ALI20161121BHEP Ipc: H01L 29/786 20060101ALI20161121BHEP |
|
INTG | Intention to grant announced |
Effective date: 20161220 |
|
GRAS | Grant fee paid |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR3 |
|
GRAA | (expected) grant |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009210 |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: B1 Designated state(s): DE FI FR GB NL |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: GB Ref legal event code: FG4D |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R096 Ref document number: 602006052413 Country of ref document: DE |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: NL Ref legal event code: MP Effective date: 20170503 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: FI Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20170503 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: DE Payment date: 20170905 Year of fee payment: 12 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: NL Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20170503 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R097 Ref document number: 602006052413 Country of ref document: DE |
|
PLBE | No opposition filed within time limit |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009261 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: NO OPPOSITION FILED WITHIN TIME LIMIT |
|
26N | No opposition filed |
Effective date: 20180206 |
|
GBPC | Gb: european patent ceased through non-payment of renewal fee |
Effective date: 20170913 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: FR Ref legal event code: ST Effective date: 20180531 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: GB Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20170913 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: FR Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20171002 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R119 Ref document number: 602006052413 Country of ref document: DE |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: DE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20190402 |